JP7434231B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

A gaming machine, such as a pachinko game machine, has been proposed that is capable of executing a countdown notice as a look-ahead notice, and there are cases where the countdown notice is executed to the end and cases where the countdown notice is ended midway. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP2020-58940A

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in improving the interest through presentation.

This invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves gaming interest through performance.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention:
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is started;
and effect execution means capable of starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display that is the target of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means,
The performance execution means is
As execution patterns of the specific performance, there are a plurality of first patterns that inherit the performance mode after the variable display that was the subject of the determination, and a plurality of first patterns that do not inherit the performance mode after the variable display that was the subject of the determination. 2 patterns,
After starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect,
The specific effect starts execution with the first pattern and ends with the first pattern, rather than starting with the second pattern and ending with the second pattern. In this case, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher, and after execution starts with the second pattern than when execution starts with the first pattern and ends with the first pattern. When the first pattern is switched to and executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher,
A plurality of the first patterns may be executed depending on the case where execution of the specific effect is started in the first pattern and the case where the execution of the specific effect is started in the second pattern and then switched to the first pattern. The rate at which the specific performance is executed differs,
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined performance and the specific performance to improve the game's interest.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like. It is a figure showing an example of the random number for games. It is a flowchart showing main processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special symbol process processing jump table. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing for production control. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a screen display. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a command at the time of starting opening prize winning. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance image display. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance image display. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance image display. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance image display. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance image display. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance image display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a look-ahead effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of use of the memory data regarding a look-ahead effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of character movement effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of use of the memory data regarding character movement effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a performance pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a decision of a performance pattern, etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of use of the data regarding timer effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of use of the data regarding timer effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during execution of a character movement effect. It is a figure which shows the example of use of the memory data regarding the process during execution of a character movement effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production pattern fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a decision regarding active display change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a decision regarding after-reach performance. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a performance control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during production pattern variation. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a character display rate. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a figure which shows the execution control example of the active display change effect. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a figure which shows the execution control example of the performance which makes a performance pattern transparent. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. It is a diagram showing an example of execution control of a timer standby effect and a timer effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the right side of the gaming area. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each capable of variably displaying special symbols as a plurality of types of special identification information. Special designs are also called "tokuzu." The variable display of special symbols is also called a "special symbol game." The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are both configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers representing "0" to "9", symbols representing "-", and other arbitrary lighting patterns. The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

"Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner. Regarding other symbols such as performance symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols, "variable display" similarly refers to displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. The production design is also called a decorative design or a decorative design. The variable display is also referred to as a variable display or simply a fluctuation. Variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scrolling display of a plurality of symbols, deformation, enlargement, and reduction of one or more symbols. The variation may include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. In the variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are displayed in an updateable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, a plurality of types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of arbitrary symbols, a predetermined symbol is finally displayed in a stopped state as a display result. The stop display is also called a lead-out display or simply a lead-out display. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the variable display is also referred to as the final stop symbol or final symbol. The final stop symbol in a special pattern game is also called a confirmed special symbol. The display results of the variable display include the display results of special symbols, and are also referred to as variable display results. The display result of the special symbol is also referred to as the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol variation time which is the variation time of the special symbol, and is also referred to as the variable display time. The special symbol variation time can be set to different times depending on the variation patterns of special symbols for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol". The special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". A special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game." A special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game." The number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the left side of the gaming area. The normal symbol display device 20 can variably display normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary designs are also called ``fuzu''. The variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a "general symbol game." The normal symbol display 20 is constructed using a 7-segment LED or the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers representing "0" to "9", symbols representing "-", and other arbitrary lighting patterns. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which some or all of a plurality of LEDs are turned on, and a pattern in which all of a plurality of LEDs are turned off. The final stop symbol in a regular pattern game is also called a fixed normal symbol. The display result of the normal pattern is also referred to as the normal pattern display result. The execution time during which the normal symbols are variably displayed in the general pattern game is also referred to as the normal pattern fluctuation time. The ordinary symbol fluctuation time can be set to different times in correspondence with the fluctuation patterns of the ordinary symbols for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), a dot matrix LED, a projector and a screen, a stereoscopic image projection device, or any other mechanism capable of forming an arbitrary image. Bye. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various effect images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to performance images, and can display any control-related images such as inspection images and setting images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of production symbols can be executed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The production pattern is a display pattern that shows numbers, etc., and is a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern and the normal pattern. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. In synchronization with the game, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner by, for example, being scrolled up and down or updated. The synchronization of variable display may be such that the timing at which the variation of the symbol starts and the timing at which the variation ends and the symbol is finally stopped and displayed are common timings for different types of symbols. . The final stop symbol in the variable display of performance symbols is also referred to as a determined performance symbol, a determined decorative symbol, or a determined decorative symbol. Since the variable display of the production symbols is synchronized with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the variable display time of the production symbols is the same as the special symbol variation time.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 in which effect images corresponding to the pending display and the active display can be displayed. The pending display is a display corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet and is on hold. The active display is a display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. The display area where the hold display is performed is also referred to as the hold display area. A display area where active display is performed is also referred to as an active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The total value of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. . The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal symbol display 20 shown in FIG. 1, a normal symbol holding display 25C including a plurality of LEDs is provided. The ordinary figure holding display 25C displays the number of ordinary figures held stored by the number of LEDs lit. The number of reserved memories of common figures is the number of reserved memories corresponding to the common figure game.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. The variable prize winning ball device 6B serves as a normal electric accessory and forms a second starting winning opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric accessory solenoid 81 shown in FIG. The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, thereby causing the second start. The winning opening is in a closed state in which game balls do not enter, or the second start winning opening is in a normal open state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter. In the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces are in the tilted position, so that the second starting prize opening is in an open state in which a game ball can enter or the second starting winning opening is in an open state where a game ball can enter. The mouth is in an enlarged open state where game balls can easily enter. The open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting prize opening and the enlarged open state in which it is easy to enter are also referred to as the first variable state. The closed state in which game balls do not enter the second starting prize opening and the normal open state in which it is difficult to enter are also referred to as the second variable state. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between the first variable state and the second variable state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

Entering the game ball into the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also referred to as a first starting winning. Entering the game ball into the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as a second starting winning. The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the occurrence of the first starting prize, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example three, are paid out, and the first reserved memory number can be updated by one. However, when the number of first reserved memories has reached the upper limit number, even if the first starting winning occurs, the first number of reserved memories is not updated. Corresponding to the case where the first pending storage number is incremented by 1, the first starting condition is satisfied, and the first special symbol game in which the special symbols are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A becomes executable. Based on the occurrence of the second starting prize, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example three, are paid out, and the second pending memory number can be updated by one. However, when the second pending memory number has reached the upper limit number, the second pending memory number is not updated even if a second starting winning occurs. Corresponding to the case where the second pending storage number is incremented by 1, the second starting condition is satisfied, and the second special symbol game in which special symbols are variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes executable.

A general prize opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2, and is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 1, general winning holes 10 are provided at two locations on the lower left side of the gaming area. When a game ball enters any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example 10, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first route and a second route are provided as downstream routes for the game balls to flow down. The first path is mainly provided in an area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left side area of the image display device 5 is also referred to as a left side gaming area or a left gaming area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also referred to as a right side gaming area or a right gaming area. The left side game area and the right side game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area, the arrangement of game nails, or the like. Shooting the game ball toward the left side game area in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is also called left-handed hitting. Shooting the game ball toward the right side game area in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is also called right-handed hitting. The first route is also referred to as a left-handed batting route. The second route is also referred to as a right-handed batting route. The first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes.

A game ball is ejected from the ball launcher and driven into a game area in response to an operation of a ball operation handle provided on the ball launcher. When the game ball hit in the game area is guided to the left side game area and flows down the first path, it is guided along the array of game nails, for example, and is guided to the second path in the right side game area. Impossible or difficult to guide. When the game ball hit in the game area is guided to the right side game area and flows down the second path, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example, so that it does not flow to the first path in the left side game area. Impossible or difficult to guide.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on the first route in the left side gaming area, and game balls flowing down the first route can enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B is provided on the second route in the right side game area, and allows the game balls flowing down the second route to enter. In addition, the variable prize winning ball device 6B may allow the game balls flowing down the first route in the left side game area to enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be arranged so that the game balls flowing down the second route in the right side gaming area can more easily enter than the game balls flowing down the first route in the left side gaming area.

A passage gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50 are provided on the second route in the right side gaming area. The passage gate 41 forms a passage area through which game balls can pass. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, it becomes possible to add and update the number of normal reserved memories, and it becomes possible to perform variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display 20 as a normal symbol game. The passage gate 41 can be configured as a normal symbol operation opening into which game balls can enter. In this case, the gate switch 21 can be configured as a normal symbol operating port switch capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the normal symbol operating port.

The special variable winning ball device 50 forms a big winning hole that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a big winning hole solenoid 82 as a special electric accessory. The upper part of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage having a passage width in the front and back direction to the extent that the game balls can pass through. This guide path slopes downward from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on the front side and the back side on both sides of the extended passage. In the center of the guide path, there is formed an access entrance that serves as a big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 movable in the front and back direction is provided as a big winning hole opening/closing member at a position where the big winning hole can be opened and closed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a fixed member 53 that forms a fixed passage is provided in a portion of the guiding passage where the big winning opening is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the big prize opening solenoid 82, and can move forward and backward to open and close the accessory entrance which becomes the big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50, the game ball that enters the inside from the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a V winning area 51, which is a specific area, is provided as a winning area through which game balls can pass. Further, inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a normal area different from the V winning area 51 is provided. A plate-shaped distribution member that can switch the V winning area 51 between an open state and a closed state is provided above the V winning area 51 as a V winning opening opening/closing member. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning area 51. A game ball can pass through the V winning area 51 when it is in an open state, and a game ball cannot pass through it when it is in a closed state. The game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected by the specific area switch 24. The game ball that does not pass through the V winning area 51 passes through the normal area. The game balls that have passed through the V winning area 51 and the gaming balls that have passed through the normal area without passing through the V winning area 51 are both detected by the ejection port switch 26 and then released outside the special variable winning ball device 50. is discharged to.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for lighting effects are provided around the gaming area. There is. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED. A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 to operate according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball-striking operation handle that is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area using a ball-striking device. The batting operation handle is also referred to as an operation knob. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a batting ball that holds game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be able to be supplied to the batting ball firing device. A feeding tray is provided. The batted ball supply tray is also called an upper tray. A prize ball storage tray is provided below the upper tray, in which prize balls dispensed when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided. The stick controller 31A can be held and tilted by the player, and is provided with a trigger button that can be pushed or pulled by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B shown in FIG. In the pachinko game machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B are used as detection means for detecting actions such as operations by the player, but detection means other than these may be used.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous Fuzu game is being executed, the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately, so the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately. , for example, up to a predetermined upper limit number such as "4". In the common pattern game, when a specific normal symbol, such as a common pattern winning symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "common pattern winning". On the other hand, when a normal symbol other than the normal pattern winning pattern, such as a normal pattern loss pattern, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern loss". When it is a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to bring the variable winning ball device 6B into an open state or an enlarged open state for a predetermined period of time. At this time, the second starting prize opening is in an open state or an enlarged open state.

When the game ball passes through and enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A can be started. When the game ball passes through and enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B can be started. In addition, even if the game ball enters the starting prize opening and a starting prize occurs during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state or the small winning game state is controlled, the corresponding prize will not be awarded. Since the special figure game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately, the special drawing game based on the starting winning is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number such as "4" is reached, for example. In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol such as a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot". On the other hand, when a predetermined special symbol different from the jackpot symbol, such as a small prize symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "small prize". Further, when a special symbol different from a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol, such as a losing symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "losing". Furthermore, when a special symbol different from a jackpot symbol, small prize symbol, or loss symbol, such as a time-saving symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol may become "time-saving". . The special symbol may not include a time-saving symbol. That is, the display result of the special symbol may not include "time saving".

In the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time is until the timing when a predetermined period elapses, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the timing when the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. Continued. The predetermined period in which the big winning hole can be controlled to be open is the upper limit period during which the big winning hole can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the jackpot opening is open in the jackpot game state is called a round or a round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached, such as 15 times or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it becomes to the player.

When the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot", it includes a plurality of jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the big winning opening such as the number of rounds and the upper limit opening period, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state such as the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state can be set in multiple types, and the jackpot can be set according to each setting. Type is specified. The plurality of jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types that can get many prize balls, the jackpot types that can get few prize balls, or the jackpot types that can hardly get any prize balls. Alternatively, the prize balls that can be obtained may include jackpot types of the same degree. Being controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of a special symbol being a "jackpot" is also referred to as a symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot, a variable display jackpot, or a direct jackpot.

In the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. In the small winning game state, the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in the same manner as the jackpot gaming state in some jackpot types. It is sufficient that the big prize openings can be opened in the same manner by sharing the number of openings and the opening period. Alternatively, in the small winning gaming state, the big winning opening may be opened in a different opening manner from that in the jackpot gaming state. Similar to the jackpot type, a plurality of small hit types may be included even when the display result of the special symbol is a "small hit." The jackpot type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the big prize opening in the small winning game state is also referred to as the starting operation. When in the small winning game state, when the accessory entrance which becomes the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 50 is opened and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, The conditions for generating a jackpot are established, and it becomes possible to control the jackpot game state. The fact that the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V winning by passing through the V winning area 51 in the small winning gaming state is also referred to as a jackpot via small winning.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state can be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state in accordance with the jackpot type. Further, in the special figure game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "time saving", the gaming state is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state but is controlled to the time saving state. The time saving state is a gaming state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more easily executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special figure game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second starting prize opening than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball can easily pass through the second starting prize opening is also referred to as base control. Base control in the normal state is also referred to as normal base control or low base control. The base control in the time saving state includes high base control. In addition to high base control, the time saving state may include medium base control. The medium base control is a base control in which the game ball is easier to pass through the second starting prize opening than the low base control, but it is more difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening than the high base control. The gaming state in which the medium base control is performed is also referred to as the medium base state. The gaming state in which high base control is performed is also referred to as a high base state. High base control is also referred to as high open control.

In the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, the time-saving symbol can be stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol. However, in the case of the medium base state and the case of the high base state, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, the base control based on the time saving symbol is not performed, and the medium base state or the high base state No new control to transition to the high base state is initiated. In the time saving state, time saving control is possible in which the average variable display time is made shorter than in the normal state. Accordingly, the time saving state is also referred to as a time saving state.

The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, so it is included in special states that are advantageous for the player and are different from the jackpot gaming state. When the gaming state is in a variable probability state, in addition to time saving control, variable probability control is possible in which the probability that the display result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. As a result, the probability variable state is also referred to as the probability variable state. In addition to improving the variation efficiency of special symbols, the variable probability state is a state in which a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is included in special states that are advantageous for the player and are different from the jackpot gaming state. The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of predetermined end conditions is satisfied first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times or the control to the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-of-time cut. The time-saving state where the number of times is cut is also referred to as the time-saving state where the number of times is cut. The number-cut definite variable state is also called the number-cut definite variable.

The gaming state that becomes the normal state is a gaming state that is not included in an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, a predetermined state such as a small winning gaming state, or a special state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In the normal state, the probability that the displayed result in the general drawing game is a "normal drawing hit", the probability that the displayed result in the special drawing game is a "jackpot", etc. is controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is in a gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a control state after the initial setting process is executed without executing a predetermined recovery process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed, for example.

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a variable probability state as a gaming state.

After the small winning gaming state ends, there are cases where the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of a V winning, and cases where the gaming state before the small winning gaming state is not changed without a V winning occurring. be. However, if the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win" and the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the number cut, the control of the time saving state and variable probability state may end and the state returns to the normal state. . Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a small winning gaming state as a gaming state. That is, the display result of the special symbol may not include a "small hit".

It may be possible to control the gaming state to a time saving state when a time saving condition based on the number of executions of the variable display is satisfied. This time-saving state is also called relief time-saving. The time saving condition is that even if variable display is performed a specific number of times, a new jackpot game state or Any condition may be satisfied as long as it can be satisfied when control to the time saving state is not performed.

(Progress of production, etc.)
The pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects as the game progresses. This performance includes a performance that notifies the progress of the game and a performance that makes the game more exciting. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, and controlling the stick controller. It may include vibrating the push button 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, as long as it can be executed using any production device.

Performances that can be executed as the game progresses include variable display of performance symbols. In response to the start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L provided on the screen of the image display device 5, At 5C and 5R, variable display of performance symbols is started. When the confirmed special symbol that becomes the display result in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is stopped and displayed, the confirmed performance symbol that becomes the display result in the variable display of the performance symbol is stopped and displayed. The confirmed performance symbols are composed of a combination of three performance symbols corresponding to the "left", "middle", and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of performance symbols, the display mode in the variable display of performance symbols may become a ready-to-reach mode. The reach mode is a mode in which when the effect symbols that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the effect symbols that have not yet stopped continue to fluctuate. . The fact that the display mode in the variable display of the performance symbols becomes the ready-to-reach mode is also said to be established.

A ready-to-win presentation can be executed in response to the variable display of the presentation symbol being in a ready-to-win mode. The pachinko game machine 1 is capable of executing a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances such that when the performance modes are different, the percentage of the display result of the variable display being a "jackpot" is different. The proportion of "jackpots" corresponding to the performance mode is also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. In addition, it may include a short reach and a long reach whose execution time is longer than the short reach, depending on the execution time of the reach effect.

When the display result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot", confirmed performance symbols forming a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the performance symbol. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same production symbols, such as a production symbol showing the number "7", are aligned and are on a predetermined effective line. will stop appearing. In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" which is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd-numbered performance symbols such as performance symbols showing the number "7" may be stopped and displayed all together. In the case of a "non-probable variable jackpot" which is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, even-numbered performance symbols such as performance symbols showing the number "6" may be stopped and displayed all together. The "non-probable jackpot" is also referred to as the "normal jackpot." In this case, the odd-numbered production pattern is also referred to as a variable probability pattern. Even-numbered production symbols are also called non-probable variations or regular symbols. After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special symbol becomes a "small win", confirmed performance symbols that form a predetermined small win combination are stopped and displayed as the display result of the performance symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same production symbols, such as production symbols indicating numbers other than "7", are aligned and a predetermined effective line is displayed. It may be displayed stopped above. A common confirmed performance pattern may be stopped and displayed when the display result of the special pattern becomes a "big hit" and a "small win."

When the display result of a special symbol is a "lose", the display result may be stopped and displayed without becoming a ready-to-win mode in the variable display of the production symbol. In this case, as a display result of the performance symbols, the confirmed performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed. A display result in which the fixed effect pattern of a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without becoming a reach mode is also referred to as a non-reach loss. When the display result of the special symbol is a "lose", the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a ready-to-win mode, and the display result may be stopped and displayed after the ready-to-reach effect is executed. In this case, as a display result of the performance symbols, the confirmed performance symbols of the ready-to-win combinations that are not the jackpot combination or the small win combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect design of the reach combination is stopped and displayed after reaching the reach mode is also referred to as reach loss.

The performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displays corresponding to variable displays such as a pending display and an active display. In addition, for example, a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability can be executed while the performance symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a variable preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability that corresponds to the variable display that is being executed, and a look-ahead preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability that corresponds to the variable display that is pending before execution. May include. The pre-read preview effect may be a change effect that changes the display mode of a variable display compatible display such as a hold display or an active display to a different mode than usual.

On the screen of the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the performance design during the variable display of the performance design and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be pseudo-like multiple variable display. It may also be possible to perform a pseudo-coupling effect that makes it look like this. The pseudo-continuous performance may be set so that the jackpot reliability is higher when the number of re-variations in which the variable display is restarted after temporarily stopping the performance symbol is greater than when the number of re-variations is small. . The variable display of performance symbols may include a case where a pseudo-continuous performance is executed before the ready-to-win mode is reached, and a case where a pseudo-continuous presentation is executed after the ready-to-win mode is achieved. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, it may be possible to execute the pseudo continuous performance at a plurality of timings.

While controlling the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance that notifies the number of rounds, and a promotion performance that suggests or notifies that the advantage of the jackpot game state will improve. While controlling the small winning game state, it is possible to execute a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state. By executing a common effect while controlling the jackpot gaming state and the small winning gaming state, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. It may be made unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

In a non-gaming state in which a special figure game or the like is not being executed and the game is not in progress, a demonstration image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The performance image for demonstration is also referred to as a demo image. Displaying a demo image is also referred to as demo display. Performances based on demonstration displays are also referred to as customer-waiting demonstration performances.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board.

The main board 11 is a main side control board, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The progress of the game is the execution of various games and game states, such as the execution of a special figure game with pending management, the execution of a general figure game with pending management, jackpot game state, small win game state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. including migration. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and a random number. It can be configured to include a circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. Part or all of the ROM 101, RAM 102, and random number circuit 104 may have a configuration that can be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, or may have a configuration that is built in the game control microcomputer 100. good. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. Various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, starting ports switches such as a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and a discharge port switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is a nonvolatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in the ROM 101 includes variable patterns, performance control commands, and other various settings, judgments, and table data constituting a table used for determination. The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is a temporary storage device that provides a work area used for game control and a stack for saving data. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that saves the storage contents in part or all of the storage area so that they can be restored within a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes a storage area that can store various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and other storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 included in the game control microcomputer 100 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to programs stored in the ROM 101.

A random number circuit 104 included in the game control microcomputer 100 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used when controlling the progress of the game. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers. A part or all of the gaming random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103.

FIG. 3 shows an example of random numbers for gaming. The random numbers for gaming are random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, random number MR1-2 for winning symbols, random number MR1-3 which becomes the initial value for winning symbols, and random number MR2-1 for symbols per normal symbol. , a random number MR2-2 that becomes the initial value for the symbol per normal symbol, a random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect, and a random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type. , random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern.

The random number MR1-1 for special symbol judgment determines the display result of the special symbol, such as whether or not to make the display result of the special symbol a "big hit" or not, and whether or not to make the display result of the special symbol a "small hit." Used for judgment. Random numbers MR1-2 for winning symbols are used to select confirmed special symbols, such as jackpot symbols when the display result of a special symbol is changed to a "jackpot" or small win symbols when the display result of a special symbol is changed to a "small win." Used to select from multiple special symbols. The random number MR1-3, which is the initial value for the winning symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2. The random number MR2-1 for symbols per normal symbol is used to select a confirmed normal symbol to be displayed from a plurality of normal symbols when the display result is "per ordinary symbol" in the variable display of the normal symbol. The random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for each symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR2-1. The random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbol to one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a loss performance is used to select whether or not to take the ready-to-win mode in the variable display of performance symbols when the display result of the special symbol is a "loss". The random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is used to select the variation pattern type of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern type is a group in which the special symbol variation patterns are classified in advance based on, for example, the performance mode during variable display of the production symbol, and is configured to include one or more variation patterns. Bye. The random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The CPU 103 reads various tables from the ROM 101 and refers to them when making various judgments and decisions based on random numerical values, such as numerical data indicating the value of random numbers for gaming. Even when random numbers are not used, necessary tables may be read out from the ROM 101 and referred to to perform various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

The I/O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 includes an input port to which various signals are input, and an output port to which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. Various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 include a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first reservation display 25A, a second reservation display 25B, It suffices if it includes a signal for controlling the ordinary figure holding display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 outputs, by the game control microcomputer 100, a production control command according to the progress of the game to the production control board 12 as part of the operation for controlling the progress of the game. The production control command is a command that specifies or notifies the progress of the game. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The production control commands include commands that specify various decision results on the main board 11, such as display results of special drawing games, winning types, and fluctuation patterns; Any command may be used as long as it includes a command that specifies the gaming situation, such as the occurrence of an error, the number of pending memories, and the gaming status, and a command that specifies the occurrence of an error.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving production control commands and controlling production based on the received production control commands. The performances that can be controlled by the performance control board 12 are various performances according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also include various notifications such as error notification and power failure recovery notification. The production control board 12 includes a production control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of the effect together with the display control unit 123. This process is a process for realizing various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determining the effect to be executed. The performance control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data on various tables, and also uses the RAM 122 as a main memory. The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be any signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and mainly executes effects related to display based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. control possible. The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal specifies the lighting mode and extinguishing mode of the game effect lamp 9. By supplying the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, it becomes possible to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R and to turn on or off the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be able to supply a signal for operating the movable body 32 to a motor or a solenoid of the movable body 32 or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. Separately from the production control board 12, a driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used when controlling the execution of various effects. The random numbers used to control the performance are also referred to as performance random numbers. The random number for presentation may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the presentation control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 reads out and refers to various tables from the ROM 121 when making various judgments and decisions based on random numerical values, such as numerical data indicating the value of the random number for performance. Even when random numbers are not used, the performance control CPU 120 may read out and refer to necessary tables from the ROM 121 to perform various judgments, decisions, settings, and the like.

The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 is an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14. It is sufficient if it includes an output terminal.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal to the speaker. Output from 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and operates the game effect lamp in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn 9 on or off. In this way, the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on the signal from the display control section 123. Note that the control of the movable body 32, such as the supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, the control of audio output and lighting and extinguishing of lamps, and the supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, are partially performed by the performance control CPU 120. Or all of them may be executed. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function, or unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions. good.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an alternating current power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared. The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending power-on by operating the power switch 91. A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes main processing for game control.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the main processing P_MAIN for game control executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the main process P_MAIN for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 executes the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON (step S1), and then executes the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK (step S2). The power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON in step S1 can perform initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 and the like in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko game machine 1. Initial settings of the game control microcomputer 100 may include initialization of output ports, settings of interrupt vectors, settings of built-in device registers, and settings of specific registers. The RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2 includes a checksum calculation process, and the checksum data obtained as a result of the process is compared with the data stored in the checksum buffer, and if both data match, the data stored in the RAM 102 is The content is determined to be normal.

Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery conditions can be established when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in an off state, the checksum buffer has normal stored data, and the stored contents in the RAM 102 as a backup RAM are normal. . For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed down when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The checksum buffer stores checksum data calculated in a checksum calculation process when a backup determination time is measured by a backup monitoring timer at the previous power-off. If the measured value of the backup monitoring timer does not match the specific value corresponding to the backup determination time, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be data stored in a game work area in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it may be determined whether the recovery conditions can be satisfied based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. by the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK of step S2.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), backup setting processing P_BACKUP_SET is executed (step S4). The backup time setting process P_BACKUP_SET uses the backup time command transmission table to enable the production control command corresponding to the backup time to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. Further, the backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET enables initialization by clearing the process code, timer, counter, and flag specified by the backup setting table.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization setting processing P_INIT_SET is executed (step S5). The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables clear data to be transferred to the game work area which becomes the work area in the RAM 102. As a result, the game work area in the RAM 102 is initialized. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET uses the initialization command transmission table to enable the production control command corresponding to the initialization to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. Further, the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables initialization by clearing the buffer, timer, pointer, and counter specified by the initialization setting table.

Thereafter, control start setting processing P_STACON is executed (step S6). The control start setting process P_STACON may include wait processing. The wait process ensures that sub-boards such as the effect control board 12 can be activated by executing a loop process and waiting until a set standby time elapses. Further, the control start setting process P_STACON may include a specific number of times command transmission process or a chip individual number information command transmission process. The specific number of times command transmission process enables the main board 11 to transmit the effect control command that specifies the count value of the specific number of times counter when the power is turned on to the effect control board 12. The specific number of times counter may be provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102 and can count the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number corresponding to the time saving condition. The chip individual number information command transmission process enables the main board 11 to transmit the performance control command specifying the stored value of the chip individual number register to the performance control board 12. The chip individual number register may be included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 100, as long as it can store different values assigned to each chip as the chip individual number.

The control start setting process P_STACON may include processing outside the startup area. The startup-time out-of-area process is a process that is executed by reading a program stored in the non-gaming program area of the ROM 101 in response to the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The out-of-area processing at startup may be, for example, performance display RWM initial value setting processing. The performance display RWM initial value setting process enables setting of initial values for initial display by the 7-segment LEDs forming the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor may be mounted on the main board 11, for example, and can display content related to set values and content related to the base. The setting value can be changed to any one of multiple stages, for example 6 stages, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a setting change state where the settings can be changed, and the probability that the display result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" be configurable. The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls pass through each winning hole, such as the starting prize hole, general prize hole, and big prize hole, by the number of game balls fired into the gaming area. Calculated.

After the control start setting process P_STACON in step S6, timer interrupt counter setting is performed (step S7). In step S7, the PTC counter output value is set so that a regular timer interrupt occurs at predetermined intervals of, for example, 4 [ms (milliseconds)]. After that, the main process P_MAIN for game control enters a loop process. In this loop processing, interrupts are disabled (step S8), initial value determination random number update processing P_TFINIT is executed (step S9), and after executing loop outside area processing P_REGOUT (step S10), interrupts are enabled. is set (step S11), and the process returns to step S8. Then, each time an interrupt request signal is input from the PTC to the CPU 103 when the interrupt is enabled, the CPU 103 becomes able to execute timer interrupt processing. This allows the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing every time a predetermined period of time, such as 4 [ms], elapses.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control. In the timer interrupt process P_PCT shown in FIG. 5, a power-off process P_POWER_OFF is executed (step S51). Subsequently, it is determined whether the fraud monitoring flag is "0" (step S52). The fraud monitoring flag is set to "1" corresponding to the on state when magnetism is detected by the magnet sensor or when radio waves are detected by the frame radio wave sensor. Otherwise, the fraud monitoring flag is set to "0", which corresponds to an off state.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "1" (step S52; No), a game stop process P_GAME_STOP is executed (step S53). The game stop process P_GAME_STOP may be a process that initializes the output port and turns off the output of the connection confirmation signal. The connection confirmation signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board, and when it is in the off state, execution of the payout process in the payout control board is stopped.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "0" (step S52; Yes), the switch process P_SW is executed (step S54), the switch error notification process P_CON_CHK is executed (step S55), and the random number update process P_RANDOM is executed. (Step S56), and executes initial value determination random number update processing P_TFINIT (Step S57). In addition, the special symbol process process P_TPROC is executed (step S58), the normal symbol process process P_FPROC is executed (step S59), the information output process P_JYOUHOU is executed (step S60), and the prize ball process P_PAY is executed (step S61). ), the display process P_HYOUZI is executed (step S62). Further, other timer interrupt handling processing is executed (step S63). Thereafter, after interrupt permission is set (step S64), the timer interrupt process P_PCT ends.

The power-off process P_POWER_OFF in step S51 determines the power confirmation signal transmitted from the power supply board 17, and enables execution of checksum calculation processing and the like at the time of power-off. The switch process P_SW in step S54 determines the state of the input port and enables updating of the switch-on buffer and the like. The switch error notification process P_CON_CHK in step S55 can update the count value of the sensor on counter specified by the switch error notification determination table, for example, and when the count value reaches the sensor abnormality error determination value, an error notification is displayed. make it executable. The random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56 allows software to update the gaming random numbers that become software random numbers. The initial value determining random number update process P_TFINIT in step S57 allows software to update the random number used as the random number initial value among the gaming random numbers.

The special symbol process process P_TPROC in step S58 includes processing related to the variable display of special symbols and the gaming state, such as managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state, and controlling the gaming state. It will be done. The normal symbol process process P_FPROC in step S59 manages the execution and suspension of the common symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and controls the opening/closing of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "hitting a common symbol", etc. Processing related to variable display and state control of the second starting prize opening is included. Information output processing P_JYOUHOU in step S60 sets an information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information. The jackpot information indicates the number of jackpot occurrences. The starting information indicates the number of starting prizes and the like. The probability variation information indicates the number of times the probability variation state has occurred. The prize ball process P_PAY in step S61 includes a prize ball command output counter addition process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter addition process uses the prize ball number table to determine whether the switch is on, and when the switch is turned on, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects a process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the game ball to be paid out based on the detection of game balls. The display process P_HYOUZI in step S62 performs settings regarding the display by the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the standard hold indicator 25C, and other various status indicator lights.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S58 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process P_TPROC. The CPU 103 performs the first starting winning correspondence flag setting in the special symbol process process P_TPROC (step S101). The first starting prize corresponding flag setting reflects the state of the first starting port switch 22A included in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 by executing a logical operation instruction or the like. At this time, the fact that the zero flag in the flag register is in the on state indicates that the first starting prize corresponding flag is in the off state. On the other hand, the fact that the zero flag is in the OFF state indicates that the first starting prize winning flag is in the ON state. Subsequently, a first starting slot winning table is set by a transfer command for setting a table pointer (step S102). After that, it is determined whether or not the first starting prize corresponding flag is on (step S103). When the first starting prize corresponding flag is on (step S103; Yes), starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON is executed (step S104).

If the first starting prize corresponding flag is off in response to step S103 (step S103; No), or after the starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104, the second starting winning corresponding flag is set (step S105). . The second starting prize corresponding flag setting reflects the state of the second starting port switch 22B included in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 by executing a logical operation instruction or the like. At this time, the fact that the zero flag in the flag register is in the on state indicates that the second start winning prize corresponding flag is in the off state. On the other hand, the fact that the zero flag is in the OFF state indicates that the second starting prize-winning flag is in the ON state. Subsequently, a second starting slot winning table is set by a transfer command for setting a table pointer (step S106). After that, it is determined whether or not the second starting prize corresponding flag is on (step S107). When the second starting prize corresponding flag is on (step S107; Yes), starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON is executed (step S108).

The starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step 104 uses the first starting port winning table set in step S102 to determine whether the first pending memory number or the total pending memory number is less than the upper limit number. The memory number is updated by adding 1, and the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a loss effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the type of variation pattern, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern. -4 is extracted and stored in each random number buffer, and then transferred to the first special symbol holding buffer. Further, by using the first pending storage information designation command transmission table, the first pending storage information designation command in which the first pending storage number is specified can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. Then, a value indicating "1" as the starting opening winning designation value is stored in the starting opening winning buffer.

The starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second starting port winning table set in step S106 to determine whether the second pending memory number or the total pending memory number is less than the upper limit number. The memory number is updated by adding 1, and random number MR1-1 for special symbol judgment, random number MR3-2 for selecting loss effect, random number MR3-3 for selecting variation pattern type, and random number MR3 for variation pattern. -4 is extracted and stored in each random number buffer, and then transferred to the second special symbol holding buffer. Further, by using the second pending storage information designation command transmission table, it is possible to transmit a second pending storage information designation command in which the second pending storage number is specified from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. Then, a value indicating "2" as the starting opening winning designation value is stored in the starting opening winning buffer.

A common starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON can be executed in step S104 and step S108. On the other hand, the starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first starting port winning table set in step S102, whereas the starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the first starting port winning table set in step S106. Use the 2-start winning table. In this way, the common starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed using different starting port winning tables. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole and when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, different data settings and control can be performed by common processing. Note that the starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON may include a winning performance process using the extracted gaming random number.

If the second starting prize corresponding flag is off in response to step S107 (step S107; No), or after the starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108, a special symbol process processing jump is performed by a transfer command that sets a pointer. A table is set (step S109). The special symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that makes it possible to select and execute the process corresponding to the read value of the special symbol process code. The special symbol process code can be updated to any one of 00[H] to 0B[H] in accordance with the progress of game control in the pachinko game machine 1, and is also referred to as a special symbol process code. Here, [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. Note that [B] may also indicate a binary number.

Following step S109, a special symbol process code is loaded by a transfer command for reading stored data (step S110). Next, by executing the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC (step S111), the address of the process selected in accordance with the special symbol process code is acquired. The address obtained at this time is set to a pointer. Thereafter, by executing the process pointed to by the pointer using the subroutine call command (step S112), the process selected in response to the special symbol process code becomes executable. When the selected process is finished and the return command returns to the special symbol process process P_TPROC, this special symbol process process P_TPROC also ends, and the return command returns to the game control timer interrupt process P_PCT.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example TT01 of a special symbol process jump table used in the special symbol process P_TPROC. The special symbol process processing jump table is configured to include table data that can set the address of the process selected corresponding to the special symbol process code in the internal register of the CPU 103 used as a pointer. The special symbol process processing jump table of configuration example TT01 includes special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL when the special symbol process code is 00 [H] and special symbol variation processing P_TSTART when the special symbol process code is 01 [H]. , Special symbol stop processing P_TSTOP when the special symbol process code is 02[H], Small hit opening preprocessing P_TLFAN when the special symbol process code is 03[H], Special symbol process code is 04[H] Processing during small hit opening P_TLOPEN when the special symbol process code is 05[H], P_TLCLSF after small winning opening when the special symbol process code is 06[H], and small winning when the special symbol process code is 06[H] Ejection ball standby process P_TLOUT, small hit end process P_TLEND when the special symbol process code is 07 [H], big prize opening pre-opening process P_TINT when the special symbol process code is 08 [H], and special The process P_TOPEN during opening of the big winning hole when the symbol process code is 09[H], the post-opening process P_TCLSF when the special symbol process code is 0A[H], and the special symbol process code 0B[ A jackpot end process P_TEND in the case of [H], and table data that can set the corresponding address value as a pointer are included.

The special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL determines whether or not to start the special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reservation information, and determines the special symbol display result using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination. To make it possible to determine a fixed special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of special symbols and to determine a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special figure display results include "big hit", "small hit", "loss", etc., and when it is determined to be a "big hit", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. It is decided that. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot", which jackpot game among multiple types of jackpot game states with different advantages for the player corresponds to the jackpot symbol that becomes the confirmed special symbol. It is determined whether the state is controlled or not. Therefore, by executing the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and among multiple types of advantageous states that have different degrees of advantage for the player. It is possible to decide which of the following is to be controlled. Furthermore, the CPU 103 can determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns by executing the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL.

Special symbol fluctuation processing P_TSTART measures the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and measures the elapsed special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. It is possible to determine whether or not the The special symbol stop process P_TSTOP measures the elapsed time after the special symbol stops changing in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and determines whether the symbol stop time has elapsed. enable. The symbol stop time may be set as the time for stopping and displaying the special symbol when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process P_TSTART. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the special symbol process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the special symbol display result. For example, if the special pattern display result is a "big hit", the special pattern process code can be updated to 08[H], and if the special pattern display result is a "small hit", the special pattern process code can be updated to 03[H]. It is sufficient as long as it is updateable and the special symbol process code can be updated to 00[H] when the special symbol display result is "lost".

The small hit release preprocessing P_TLFAN, the small winning opening process P_TLOPEN, the small winning release process P_TLCLSF, the small winning ball waiting process P_TLOUT, and the small winning ending process P_TLEND are the processes for controlling the progress of the game in the small winning game state. It is. The big winning opening pre-opening process P_TINT, the big winning opening opening process P_TOPEN, the big winning opening post opening process P_TCLSF, and the jackpot ending process P_TEND are processes for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot gaming state.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the production control board 12 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 17 or the like, the production control CPU 120 is activated and executes production control main processing.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main process S_MAIN for effect control executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control board 12. When the main process S_MAIN for effect control shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control initialization process S_INIT (step S71). The production control initialization process S_INIT includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, register settings for the timer circuit mounted on the production control board 12, etc. Subsequently, initial operation control processing S_SYOKI is executed (step S72). The initial motion control process S_SYOKI enables control of the initial motion of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and performing predetermined operation checks. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined period of time, such as 2 [ms (milliseconds)] elapses, based on register settings for the timer circuit. Corresponding to the timer interrupt flag being off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and the process waits.

In response to the timer interrupt flag being turned on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), command analysis processing S_COMMAND is executed (step S75), and production control process processing S_CPROC is executed. is executed (step S76), a random number update process S_RANDOM for effect is executed (step S77), and an output process S_OUT for effect is executed (step S78). After executing other timer interrupt handling processes (step S79), the process returns to step S73.

The command analysis process S_COMMAND in step S75 enables reading of the production control command stored in the production control command reception buffer, and setting and control corresponding to the read production control command. By executing the command analysis process S_COMMAND, the production control CPU 120 stores data indicating the state of the flag, data stored in the register, and the work area of the RAM 122 in response to the production control command sent from the main board 11. It is possible to update any stored data etc. in . The production control process S_CPROC in step S76 includes, for example, the display of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting or lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. It is possible to control execution of performances using various performance devices including turning off lights and controlling the drive of a movable body 32. If it becomes possible to determine, decide, and set the control contents of performances using various production devices based on the production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the execution results of processing by the production control CPU 120, etc. good. The random number updating process S_RANDOM for performance in step S77 allows at least a part of the random number for performance used on the performance control board 12 to be updated by executing a program as software.

FIG. 9(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S76 shown in FIG. 8 as the production control process process S_CPROC. The performance control CPU 120 executes the pre-read performance setting process S_SAKI_SET in the performance control process process (step S151). The pre-read performance setting process S_SAKI_SET enables judgment, determination, setting, etc. regarding the execution of the pre-read preview performance, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11, for example. Further, the pre-read effect setting process S_SAKI_SET enables the pending display to be updated based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After the prefetch performance setting process S_SAKI_SET in step S151, a performance control process jump table is set by a transfer command to set a pointer (step S152). The production control process processing jump table is an address management table that enables selection and execution of the process corresponding to the read value of the production control process code. The performance control process code can be updated to any one of 00[H] to 0A[H] in accordance with the progress of performance control in the pachinko game machine 1, and is also referred to as a performance process code. The production control process code is loaded by a transfer command for reading stored data (step S153). Corresponding to the effect control process code thus obtained, the address of the selected process is set in the effect control pointer (step S154). Therefore, by executing the process pointed to by the production control pointer (step S115), the process selected in accordance with the production control process code becomes executable.

FIG. 9(B) shows a configuration example TT02 of the production control process jump table used in the production control process S_CPROC. The performance control process jump table is configured to include table data that allows the address of the process selected in response to the performance control process code to be set in a register used as a performance control pointer. The production control process processing jump table of configuration example TT02 includes a variation pattern command wait process when the production control process code is 00 [H], and a production pattern fluctuation start process when the production control process code is 01 [H]. , the production symbol fluctuation processing when the production control process code is 02[H], the production symbol fluctuation stop processing when the production control process code is 03[H], and the production pattern fluctuation processing when the production control process code is 04[H]. ], the small hit display process, the small hit opening process when the production control process code is 05[H], and the small hit end production process when the production control process code is 06[H]. , jackpot display processing when the production control process code is 07 [H], in-round processing when the production control process code is 08 [H], and processing when the production control process code is 09 [H] Table data is included in which address values corresponding to round post-processing and jackpot end performance processing when the performance control process code is 0A[H] can be set in the performance control pointer.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process makes it possible to determine whether or not the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 has been received. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the production control process code is updated to 01[H] corresponding to the production symbol fluctuation start processing, and when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received, the demonstration Make display controllable. The performance symbol variation start process enables the start of a variation performance corresponding to the special symbol game. For example, in response to a fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is possible to select a performance pattern used for controlling the performance during fluctuation and to start updating a performance process timer that measures the performance execution time. The processing during performance symbol variation makes it possible to control the switching timing of each performance element constituting the performance pattern, and also makes it possible to determine whether the performance execution time has elapsed based on the timed value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance control process code is updated to 03[H] corresponding to the performance symbol fluctuation stop processing. The production symbol fluctuation stop processing is based on the completion condition of the variation production, such as the elapse of the production execution time or the reception of the production symbol confirmation command, and the end control of the variation production and the confirmation special. To enable display control of performance results corresponding to symbols. At this time, the production control process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the display results of the variable display. For example, if the display result of the variable display is "Jackpot", the production control process code can be updated to 07[H], and if the display result of the variable display is "Small win", the production control process code can be updated to 04[H]. ], and if the display result of the variable display is "lost", the production control process code can be updated to 00[H].

The small win display process, the small win opening process, and the small win end performance process are processes for controlling the progress of the performance corresponding to the small win game state. The jackpot display process, mid-round process, post-round process, and jackpot end performance process are processes for controlling the progress of the performance corresponding to the jackpot game state.

(Variations of basic explanation, etc.)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, function, processing, and operation described in the basic explanation and other explanations, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features described in the embodiment, but may include some of the technical features described in the embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also have the following configuration. In the case where a matter that is a subordinate concept is described in the embodiment, an invention of a generic concept using cognate matters or similar matters, or an invention of a generic concept using common properties is considered as the claimed invention. The present invention may include some of the structures and characteristics described in the embodiments so that at least one problem in the prior art can be solved.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a prize, or an enclosed type game machine in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded depending on the occurrence of a prize. It may be a machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of special symbols may be, for example, only one type of symbol, such as a symbol indicating "-", and a variable display may be performed in which this symbol is repeatedly displayed and turned off. One type of symbol may be displayed during the variable display, and this symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, the display result may be a non-display state in which no symbol indicating "-" is displayed and no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have a configuration in which the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change in response to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, it may be possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot and the ball payout rate by using different jackpot determination values for each set value. As a specific example, the setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot increases. It gets lower. In this case, if 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side. During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate. The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . The setting suggestion performance may be such that it is possible to suggest the expected level of jackpot by an arbitrary performance and also to make a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

The invention related to gaming machines is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but can be applied to slot machines as appropriate. In the slot machine, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the operation of a control lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button by the player. Sometimes, when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a game can be executed in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. In a slot machine, an advantageous state advantageous to a player may include one or more of so-called bonuses such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

Programs and data for realizing various controls including the progress of the game and the execution of performances can be distributed and provided to the computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 using a removable recording medium. It may be possible, or it may be something that can be distributed and provided by being installed in advance in a storage device of a computer device or the like. Furthermore, it may include a communication processing unit that can be connected to an external device on a network via a communication line or the like, and can be distributed or provided by downloading programs and data from the external device. The execution form of games and performances may also be one that can be executed by attaching a removable recording medium, or the program and data downloaded via a communication line etc. may be temporarily stored in an internal memory etc. It may be directly executable using the hardware resources of an external device on a network connected via a communication line, or it may be directly executable using the hardware resources of an external device connected via a communication line or the like. It may also be possible to execute games and performances by exchanging data with other players via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as processing and data determination ratios, performance execution ratios, etc., expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" mean that one is "0%" or "100%". It may also include being. For example, regarding one decision result or execution content, it may include a case where there is no decision or execution at a rate of 0%, or a case where there is always a decision or execution at a rate of 100%.

(Explanation of characteristic part 002AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example AKP0 of a screen display in the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portion 002AK. In the configuration example AKP0, on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area AKA0, a pending display area AKB0, and a small symbol display area AKC0 are provided. The active display area AKA0 enables active display by displaying an effect image in response to variable display in progress. The pending display area AKB0 enables a pending display by displaying an effect image in response to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, the active display area AKA0 and the pending display area AKB0 can display an active display or a pending display, which is a corresponding display or a specific display corresponding to the variable display, as a display related to the variable display. The hold display area AKB0 is a first hold display area in which a first hold display can be performed by displaying a performance image that allows the number of first hold memories to be recognized, and a display of a performance image that allows the number of second hold memories to be recognized. and a second hold display area in which a second hold display can be performed.

In the active display area AKA0, an active display is started based on the pending display that was erased (digested) in the pending display area AKB0 in response to the start of the special figure game. In the hold display area AKB0, for example, it is possible to display holds that are associated with hold numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the hold display is performed in a left-aligned manner. It is sufficient that the display area is configured. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area AKA0 may be one that has the same shape, pattern, color, or a combination of all or part of these as the pending display in the pending display area AKB0. For example, the active display may be such that a common effect image with the hold display can be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may be changeable to a display mode different from that during the hold display by executing an active display change effect. In the active display area AKA0, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be distinguished from the pending display.

The small symbol display area AKC0 is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right side on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. There is. In the small symbol display area AKC0, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and performance symbols. The performance image showing the small design is smaller than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the performance design, and can be displayed variably in a display mode that is the same in whole or in part with each of the identification information images showing the performance design. Any reduced identification information image may be used. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example of the starting opening winning command included in the production control command regarding the characteristic part 002AK. The starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108 included in the special symbol process process P_TPROC shown in FIG. 6 is based on the game ball passing through the starting area such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. This enables the main board 11 to transmit a production control command specifying the occurrence of a starting prize to the production control board 12. In addition, the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON enables the main board 11 to send a production control command specifying the number of reserved memories to the production control board 12. Furthermore, the starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON executes the winning effect process using the extracted random numbers for gaming, and sends the effect control command that specifies the winning judgment result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. to enable sending. A starting opening winning designation command is prepared in advance as a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting winning. A pending storage information designation command is prepared in advance as an effect control command that specifies the number of pending memories. A winning determination result command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for specifying a winning determination result.

FIG. 10-2(A) shows a setting example of the starting opening winning designation command, the pending storage information designation command, and the winning determination result command. The starting slot winning designation command includes a command B100[H] that is a first starting slot winning designation command, and a command B200[H] that is a second starting slot winning designation command. The pending storage information designation command includes a command C1XX[H], which is a first pending storage information designation command, and a command C2XX[H], which is a second pending storage information designation command. Note that XX[H] indicates 1-byte data that is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. The pending storage information designation command may set different EXT data, such as any one of 00[H] to 04[H], corresponding to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. The winning determination result command is a command C4XX[H] that can set different EXT data in response to the determination result of the winning effect processing executed using the gaming random number.

In the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108 shown in FIG. Control allows multiple types of production control commands to be transmitted as time commands. The starting port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108 stores the extracted gaming random numbers as pending information in the first special symbol holding buffer and the second special symbol holding buffer, and uses these gaming random numbers to perform the winning performance. Make the process executable. In the winning performance processing, for example, using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, the display result of the special symbol is controlled to a jackpot game state in response to a "jackpot" before the variable display is executed. It is possible to determine whether or not the The CPU 103, which executes the winning presentation process, performs a comparison calculation with the jackpot determination value to determine whether the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, in response to the fact that the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is within the jackpot determination range, the winning determination result is set to "jackpot". Before the variable display is executed, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON, which includes such a winning presentation process, determines whether or not the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display. This is a possible means of determination.

In addition, the CPU 103 that executes the winning production processing determines that when the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is not within the jackpot determination range, the value of the random number MR3-2 for loss production selection is within the reach confirmation range. In order to determine whether or not, a comparison calculation with the reach confirmation determination value is performed. At this time, if the random number MR3-2 for selecting a loss effect is within the guaranteed reach range, further use the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type to check whether the value is within the guaranteed reach range. In order to make a determination, a comparison calculation is performed with the super reach confirmed determination value. In this way, in response to the fact that the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is within the super reach confirmed range, the winning determination result is set to "super reach confirmed in case of loss". In response to the fact that the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is not within the guaranteed super reach range, and the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing effect is within the guaranteed reach range, the winning judgment result is changed to "reach when losing". Set to ``Confirm''. Corresponding to the fact that the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect is not within the reach certainty range, the winning determination result is set to "general when losing".

FIG. 10-2(B) shows an example of the contents specified by the winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands, commands C402H, C403H, and C404H may be sent when the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is not within the jackpot determination range. , the winning determination result is notified that the display result of the special figure game is determined to be a "lose" and the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. On the other hand, command C401H is sent when the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is within the jackpot determination range, and the display result of the special symbol game is determined to be a "jackpot", thereby controlling the jackpot game state. We will notify you of the prize winning results. Note that the command C400H notifies that the winning determination is restricted.

FIG. 10-3 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern regarding the characteristic portion 002AK. As for the variation pattern, a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance in correspondence with different special symbol variation times and variable display modes of production symbols. The plurality of variation patterns related to the characteristic portion 002AK include variation patterns corresponding to any of "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", and "reach (win)". "Non-reach (loss)" is a case where the variable display of the production symbol does not reach the reach state and the fixed production symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as a display result, and the variable display result of the production symbol becomes "non-reach loss". be. "Reach (Lose)" is a case where after the variable display of the production symbols becomes the reach state, the final production symbol of the reach combination that is not a jackpot combination is stopped and the variable display result of the production symbol becomes "Reach Loss". be. "Reach (hit)" means that after the variable display of the production symbols reaches the reach state, the confirmed production symbols of the jackpot combination (or small winning combination) are stopped and displayed, and the variable display result of the production symbols becomes "jackpot" (or This is a case of a "small hit").

The fluctuation pattern corresponding to "non-reach loss" is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach loss" is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit" is a hit fluctuation pattern. be. The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are also collectively referred to as the loss variation pattern. The reach variation pattern and the winning variation pattern include the "normal" variation pattern in which the display result at the time of variable table is stopped and displayed after executing the reach effect that becomes normal reach, and the "super reach" pattern after executing the reach effect that becomes normal reach. This includes a "super" variation pattern in which the variable display results are stopped and displayed after a reach effect that develops into a reach effect that becomes a super reach effect. The reach performances that are super reach include super A and super B reach performances, which have different performance modes.

FIG. 10-4 shows an example of the structure of the fluctuation pattern determination table. The fluctuation pattern determination tables include the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table AKT01 shown in Figure 10-4 (A), the normal loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT02 shown in Figure 10-4 (B1), and the table AKT02 in Figure 10-4 (B2). The table AKT03 includes a time saving medium loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03 shown in FIG. The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table AKT01 is used when the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot". The normal time loss variation pattern determination table AKT02 is used when the display result of the special symbol is "lose" in the normal state where time saving control is not performed. The loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03 during time saving is used when the display result of the special symbol becomes "loss" in the time saving state where time saving control is performed. The normal time loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT02 and the time saving medium loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03 are included in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the display result of the special symbol is a "lose".

The special symbol process process P_TPROC shown in FIG. 6 is executed when the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL corresponding to the special symbol process code 00[H] is executed in step S112 and starts variable display of the special symbol. To enable execution of variation pattern setting processing after symbol determination processing. The fluctuation pattern setting process allows the fluctuation pattern to be determined using random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process, in order to determine the variation pattern, it is possible to use the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing effect or the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type. However, here, to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined using random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern.

When determining a fluctuation pattern, numerical data indicating random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern buffer. The fluctuation pattern buffer can store numerical data indicating random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern included in the gaming random numbers extracted when the first starting winning or the second starting winning occurs. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 compares the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern read from the buffer for variation patterns with the determined value preset in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, a variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern among the ranges of determined values assigned to each variation pattern. .

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table AKT01, the number of determined values assigned to the "super" fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is the same as that of the "normal" fluctuation patterns such as fluctuation pattern PA3-1. Decision values are assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of decision values is greater than the number of decision values assigned to the variation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern determination tables AKT02 and AKT03, the number of decision values assigned to the "normal" variation pattern such as variation pattern PA2-1 is the same as the number of decision values assigned to the "normal" variation pattern such as variation pattern PA2-2 and PA2-3. A decision value is assigned to each variation pattern such that the number of decision values is greater than the number of decision values assigned to the "super" variation pattern. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, even if the reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed, the reach effect that becomes super reach is not executed and the variable display is stopped. The jackpot expectation level (jackpot reliability level) is higher than when the display results are stopped and displayed.

The normal loss variation pattern determination table AKT02 includes variation patterns in which the number of assigned decision values differs depending on which value the first pending memory number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. may be set so that With such a setting, it is only necessary that the average variable display time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol or the effect symbol can be varied according to the number of first reserved memories. When the number of first reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be made shorter than when the number of first reserved memories is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient if a determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern. The time saving medium loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03 includes fluctuation patterns in which the number of allocated determination values differs depending on which value the second pending memory number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. may be set so that With such a setting, it is only necessary that the average variable display time (special symbol fluctuation time) of the special symbols and production symbols can be varied according to the second pending storage number. When the number of second pending memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be made shorter than when the second number of pending memories is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient if a determined value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the short-time loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03, the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern with a shorter special symbol fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern with a longer special symbol fluctuation time than in the normal time loss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT02 is determined. It is only necessary that a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of patterns becomes large. Thereby, it is only necessary to shorten the average variable display time of the special symbols and performance symbols during the time saving period when the time saving control is performed, compared to the normal time when the time saving control is not performed.

The preview performance that can be executed by the pachinko game machine 1 includes a character movement performance. The character movement effect includes a movement state display in which the display position of the effect image representing the character displayed in response to the occurrence of a starting prize is movable toward a preset destination display position. The movement state display enables a character movement effect to be executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes by displaying a effect image indicating a character selected from among a plurality of types of characters prepared in advance. . The character movement performance may be executed in different performance modes depending on the type, size, shape, pattern, color of the character, type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of arbitrary performance images. Bye. In addition, the character movement performance includes the display of a performance image showing the character on the image display device 5, the output of sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movement of the movable body 32, etc. It may be possible to perform different presentation modes using an arbitrary presentation device, such as the movement of members or a combination of all or part of these.

The character movement effect can be included in the specific effect. The specific performance is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed using, for example, a gaming random number extracted when a starting winning occurs. In cases where it is possible to determine whether or not this is the case, this is an effect that can be started before the variable display that is the target of the determination. The specific effect may be executed in different effect modes depending on the display mode of an arbitrary effect image. In addition to displaying a performance image on the image display device 5, the specific performance includes outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and operation of movable members including the movable body 32. Alternatively, it may be possible to perform different presentation modes using any presentation device, such as a combination of all or part of these.

The execution pattern of the character movement effect is a first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and a first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination. It may also include a second pattern in which it does not. As the first pattern, a single pattern or a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance. As the second pattern, a single pattern may be prepared in advance, or a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance. The timing at which the variable display subject to determination is executed can be included in the specific timing. In this case, the execution pattern of the character movement effect includes a first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the character movement effect after a specific timing, and a second pattern that does not inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect after the specific timing. be able to.

During execution of the character movement effect, a switching suggestion effect or a character concealment effect may be executed. The switching suggestion effect is included in the suggestion effect suggesting switching to the first pattern when the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern. The character concealment effect is included in the special effect that makes the character movement effect invisible. In this way, when a character movement effect that can start execution before the variable display that is the subject of judgment is being executed in the second pattern, a suggestion effect that suggests that it can be switched to the first pattern is created. It is doable. Further, it is possible to execute a character movement effect that can be started before the variable display that is the subject of the determination, and a character hiding effect that makes the character invisible.

FIG. 10-5 shows a plurality of display examples of effect images that can be applied to a character movement effect, a switching suggestion effect, and a character concealment effect. This effect image display example shows a display image showing four characters CH01 to CH04, and characters CH11 to CH14 whose display mode is different from the characters CH01 to CH04, as a plurality of effect images that can be applied when performing a character movement effect. and a display image showing the . In addition, this effect image display example includes a display image forming an effect display CJ01 as an effect image applicable when executing a switching suggestion effect, and a display image forming a concealment display CK01 as an effect image applicable when executing a character concealment effect. a display image forming a display image.

The display images of characters CH01 to CH04 shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A1) to (D1) are based on the performance pattern when there is no inheritance, in which the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the determination. This can be applied when performing a character movement effect. That is, FIG. 10-5 (A1) shows a display example of the effect image of the character CH01, which is the character "A" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance. FIG. 10-5 (B1) shows a display example of the effect image of the character CH02, which is the character "B" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance. FIG. 10-5 (C1) shows a display example of the effect image of the character CH03, which is the character "C" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance. FIG. 10-5 (D1) shows an example of a performance image display of the character CH04, which is the character "D" included in a plurality of characters, corresponding to the performance pattern when there is no inheritance.

The display images of characters CH11 to CH14 shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A2) to (D2) are based on the performance pattern when there is inheritance, in which the performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the determination. This method can be applied when performing a character movement effect. That is, FIG. 10-5 (A2) shows an example of displaying an effect image of the character CH11, which is the character "A" included in a plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is inheritance. FIG. 10-5 (B2) shows a display example of the effect image of the character CH12, which is the character "B" included in the plurality of characters, in accordance with the effect pattern when there is inheritance. FIG. 10-5 (C2) shows an example of displaying an effect image of the character CH13, which is a character "C" included in a plurality of characters, in accordance with the effect pattern when there is inheritance. FIG. 10-5 (D2) shows an example of a performance image display of the character CH14, which is the character "D" included in a plurality of characters, corresponding to the performance pattern when there is inheritance.

The character CH01 shown in FIG. 10-5 (A1) and the character CH11 shown in FIG. 10-5 (A2) have in common that they are character "A" included in multiple characters, but for example, It suffices if the presentation images differ in at least part of their shapes, patterns, and colors so that the display modes differ. The character CH02 shown in FIG. 10-5 (B1) and the character CH12 shown in FIG. 10-5 (B2) have in common that they are character "B" included in multiple characters, but for example, It suffices if the presentation images differ in at least part of their shapes, patterns, and colors so that the display modes differ. The character CH03 shown in FIG. 10-5 (C1) and the character CH13 shown in FIG. 10-5 (C2) have in common that they are the character "C" included in multiple characters, but for example, It suffices if the presentation images differ in at least part of their shapes, patterns, and colors so that the display modes differ. The character CH04 shown in FIG. 10-5 (D1) and the character CH14 shown in FIG. 10-5 (D2) have in common that they are the character "D" included in multiple characters, but for example, It suffices if the presentation images differ in at least part of their shapes, patterns, and colors so that the display modes differ. In this way, the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance, and the effect image that can be displayed according to the effect pattern when there is inheritance, are the shapes, patterns, and colors that each effect image shows. The display modes may be made different by having some parts common to each other and other parts being different. The effect images that can be displayed according to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance and the effect images that can be displayed according to the effect pattern when there is inheritance are different in the shape, pattern, and color of each effect image. By doing so, the display mode may be changed.

FIG. 10-5(E) shows a display image that can form the effect display CJ01 in the switching suggestion effect. After the switching suggestion effect is executed, the effect pattern of the character movement effect is switched from the effect pattern with no inheritance to the effect pattern with inheritance, and the effect pattern of the character movement effect is changed from the effect pattern with no inheritance to the effect pattern with inheritance. There may be cases where it is not possible to switch to the production pattern with inheritance. A performance in which the performance pattern of a character movement performance is switched from a performance pattern without inheritance to a performance pattern with inheritance is also referred to as a successful switching performance. A performance in which the performance pattern of a character movement performance cannot be switched from a performance pattern without inheritance to a performance pattern with inheritance is also referred to as a switching failure performance. Regardless of whether the switching success effect is executed or the switching failure effect is executed, it is only necessary that the switching suggestion effect using the display image forming the effect display CJ01 can be executed. Another example of a switching suggestion production is an effect production in which a production image showing a switching suggestion character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and an effect is exerted on any of the characters CH01 to CH04 displayed as suggestion targets. may be executed. The action production included in such a switching suggestion production is a display production that suggests that the production pattern will be switched at a predetermined rate by exerting an effect on any of the displayed characters CH01 to CH04. good. In addition to such display effects, output of audio by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these. It may be possible to perform the effects using an arbitrary effect device such as the above.

In this way, the switching suggestion effect starts executing the character movement effect in the second pattern, which is the effect pattern when there is no inheritance, and then whether it is switched to the first pattern or not, It is sufficient if it can be executed at a predetermined rate. However, when switching to the first pattern after the character movement effect starts to be executed in the effect pattern without inheritance, which is the second pattern, the switching suggestion effect may always be executed. On the other hand, when the character movement effect cannot be switched to the first pattern after the character movement effect starts to be executed in the second pattern, which is the effect pattern when there is no inheritance, the switching suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined rate. There may be cases where it is not.

FIG. 10-5(F) shows a display image that can form the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect. After the character concealment effect is executed, at the shift timing corresponding to the start of a new variable display, character There may be a case where the display in the character movement effect also ends when the concealment effect ends. Even if the proportion of concealment continuation, display restart, or display end is different depending on whether the character movement effect is the effect pattern without inheritance or the effect pattern with inheritance. good. Regardless of whether the concealment is continued, the display is resumed, or the display is ended, it is sufficient if the character concealment effect can be performed using the display image forming the concealment display CK01. Another example of a character concealment effect is a movable member such as the movable body 32 that moves to the front side of the display screen in the image display device 5, making the display of the character invisible or difficult to see in the character movement effect. A concealment effect may be performed. In addition to such character hiding effects, the speakers 8L and 8R output audio, the lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or all or part of these are performed. It may be possible to perform the concealed notification effect using an arbitrary effect device such as a combination.

The preview performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a pending display notice and an active display notice. The hold display notice is an example of a look-ahead notice effect, and is performed by changing at least one of the hold displays in the hold display area AKB0 to a display mode different from the normal display mode, thereby creating a special display corresponding to the hold display. It is announced that the display result will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate in the variable display of symbols, and the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Changes in the display mode of the hold display can be recognized by changing the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started to a specific color that is different from the predetermined color in normal times based on the hold display notice. It is only necessary to be able to suggest that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate. The predetermined color of the hold display during normal times may be, for example, white. The specific color different from the predetermined color in the normal state of the hold display may include, for example, blue, green, red, or the like. In addition, by changing the display pattern in the hold display to a specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern in normal times, it is possible to suggest that the expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit" is higher than usual. You can. The predetermined pattern in the normal state of the hold display may be, for example, a plain color. The specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern in the normal state of the hold display may include, for example, a cherry blossom pattern. By using a display mode that shows a predetermined message as a pending display, it may be possible to suggest that there is a high expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit." The display mode for displaying a predetermined message as a hold display may be any one that can notify messages such as "opportunity", "heat", "extreme heat", etc., for example. A change in the hold display in the hold display notice is also referred to as a "hold display change." A performance that changes the hold display based on a hold display notice is also referred to as a "hold display change performance." The pending display change performance can be included in the change performance.

The active display notice is displayed at a predetermined rate in the variable display of the special symbol that is being executed when the start condition is met by changing the active display in the active display area AKA0 to a display mode different from the display mode in normal times. It is announced that the result will be a "jackpot" and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The display mode of the active display, which is changed according to the variable display being executed due to the active display notice, is different from the normal display color, display pattern, message presence, content, etc., as in the case of the pending display notice. It's fine if you can change it to something different. A change in the active display in the active display notice is also referred to as an "active display change." A performance that changes the active display based on an active display notice is also referred to as an "active display change performance." The active display change effect can be included in the change effect. Note that the display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the pending display that can be changed by the pending display notice. The display mode of the pending display that can be changed by the pending display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice.

FIG. 10-6 shows a plurality of effect image display examples that can be applied to hold display and active display. This effect image display example includes four display images AKE0 to AKE3 as a plurality of effect images applicable to hold display and active display, and three display images as a plurality of effect images that are unique display modes applicable to active display. Contains display images AKE11 to AKE13. The number of effect images that can be applied to the hold display and the active display may be a plurality of images based on any design.

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a display image AKE0 using an effect image when displaying a round plain white color. FIG. 10-6(B) shows a display image AKE1 using an effect image when displaying a round plain blue color. FIG. 10-6(C) shows a display image AKE2 using an effect image when displaying a round plain green color. FIG. 10-6(D) shows a display image AKE3 using an effect image when displaying a round plain red color. The normal display mode in the hold display and active display is a round plain white display using the display image AKE0. Among the display images AKE0 to AKE3, when the display color of the pending display and active display is red using the display image AKE3, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the other display images AKE0 to AKE2 are used. When the display color of the pending display and active display is green using the display image AKE2, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the display color is red using the display image AKE3. When the display color of the pending display and active display is blue using the display image AKE1, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the display color is green using the display image AKE2. Among the display images AKE0 to AKE3, when the display color of the hold display or active display is white using the display image AKE0, it becomes the normal display color, and it is whiter than when the other display images AKE1 to AKE3 are used. Expectations for winning the jackpot are low. In this manner, the pending display and the active display may have different expectations for being controlled into a jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state, corresponding to a plurality of types of display modes.

FIG. 10-6(E) shows a display image AKE11 using an effect image that can notify the message "?". FIG. 10-6(F) shows a display image AKE12 using a production image that can notify the message of "opportunity". FIG. 10-6 (G) shows a display image AKE13 using a production image that can notify the user of a message of "extreme heat". Among display images AKE11 to AKE13, when a message of "extreme heat" is announced by active display using display image AKE13, the expectation level of jackpot is higher than when using other display images AKE11 and AKE12. . When a message of "chance" is announced by active display using display image AKE12, the expectation level of jackpot is lower than when display image AKE13 is used. Among the display images AKE11 to AKE13, when the message "?" is announced by active display using the display image AKE11, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the other display images AKE12 and AKE13 are used. In this way, the active display may have different expectations for being controlled into a jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state, corresponding to a plurality of types of unique display modes.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a special effect that indicates that when the variable display of the performance symbol is in the reach state, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and the game is controlled to be in the jackpot game state. It is possible to execute a reach performance that includes a performance. The post-reach performance included in the reach performance includes a background display performance, a step-up performance, and a story performance, as long as any of the performances can be selectively executed.

In the background display performance, for example, a performance image of a character notifying a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a background image. The background display effect is whether or not it is executed after the variable display reaches the reach state, and depending on the mode of effect when it is executed, the display result of the special symbol will be changed to "Jackpot" at different rates. ”, as long as it is possible to suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The background display effects include the content of the message by the character, the type, size, shape, pattern, and color of the character, the type, size, shape, pattern, and color of the outer frame, the type, size, shape, pattern, and color of the effect display. It is sufficient as long as it can be executed in different presentation modes depending on the color and other display modes of arbitrary presentation images. Any display effect different from the background display effect may be performed as long as it can be executed in a different effect mode depending on the display mode of an arbitrary effect image as appropriate.

The step-up effect is, for example, in the display area of the effect image surrounded by a rectangular outer display frame of a predetermined display color, the display contents of the effect image can be changed in a predetermined order. A performance operation is performed in which the aspect changes into multiple stages and becomes a step-up. The step-up effect is a special symbol at different rates depending on whether it is executed or not executed after the variable display reaches the reach state, and depending on the performance mode including the number of steps when executed. It is sufficient as long as it is possible to suggest that the display result will be a "jackpot" and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The step-up performance includes the display of a performance image on the image display device 5, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or Any combination of all or some of these may be used as long as it can be performed in different presentation modes using any presentation device.

In the story performance, for example, a performance image that can change continuously over time along a series of stories is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a reach performance image. The story performance is executed or not executed after the variable display reaches the reach state, and depending on the performance mode when executed, the display result of the special symbol becomes ``jackpot'' at a different rate. It is sufficient if it is possible to suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The story performance may be included in a full-screen performance that covers the entire screen by displaying a performance image over the entire display screen of the image display device 5. The story presentation may be performed by playing back a moving image or by displaying an animation of a still image.

FIG. 10-7 shows a plurality of display examples of effect images that can be applied to background display effects. This effect image display example includes three display images AKF1 to AKF3 as a plurality of effect images applicable to the background display effect. The number of effect images that can be applied to the background display effect may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a display image AKF1 using an effect image in the case of including a character image notifying the message "???". FIG. 10-7(B) shows a display image AKF2 using an effect image in the case of including a character image announcing the message "Chance!!". FIG. 10-7(C) shows a display image AKF3 using an effect image in the case of including a character image informing the message "Very hot!!". Among the display images AKF1 to AKF3, when the background display effect is executed using the display image AKF3, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the other display images AKF1 and AKF2 are used. When the background display effect is executed using the display image AKF2, the expectation level of a jackpot is lower than when the display image AKF3 is used. Among the display images AKF1 to AKF3, when the background display effect is executed using the display image AKF1, the expectation level of a jackpot is lower than when the other display images AKF2 and AKF3 are used.

FIG. 10-8 shows an example of an effect image display that can be changed when a step-up effect is executed. This effect image display example shows a case where four display images AKG1 to AKG4 are included as effect images that are changeably displayed in the step-up effect. The number of effect images displayed in a changeable manner in the step-up effect may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. Furthermore, after a single effect image is displayed in the step-up effect, a case may be provided in which the execution of the step-up effect ends without changing the display.

FIG. 10-8(A) shows a display image AKG1 using a first step performance image corresponding to the number of steps "1" when the change in performance mode in the step-up performance is the first stage. FIG. 10-8(B) shows a display image AKG2 using a second step performance image corresponding to the number of steps "2" when the change in performance mode in the step-up performance is the second stage. FIG. 10-8(C) shows a display image AKG3 using a performance image of the third step corresponding to the number of steps "3" when the change in performance mode in the step-up performance is the third stage. FIG. 10-8(D) shows a display image AKG4 using a fourth step performance image corresponding to the number of steps "4" when the change in performance mode in the step-up performance is the fourth stage.

When a step-up effect is executed, the maximum number of steps may be determined to be one of "1" to "4". The maximum number of steps indicates the number of stages in which the performance mode can be changed from the start of the step-up performance until the end of the step-up performance. Display image AKG1 includes an outer frame partial image whose display color is blue and an inner frame partial image of the first step, corresponding to the number of steps "1" in the first stage in the step-up effect. Display image AKG2 can be displayed after display image AKG1 is displayed, corresponding to the number of steps "2" in the second stage in the step-up effect, and includes an outer frame partial image whose display color is green and the second step. It contains a partial image inside the frame. Display image AKG3 can be displayed after display image AKG2 is displayed, corresponding to the number of steps "3" in the third stage in the step-up effect, and includes an outer frame image portion whose display color is red and the third step. It contains a partial image inside the frame. Display image AKG4 can be displayed after display image AKG3 is displayed, corresponding to the number of steps "4" in the fourth stage in the step-up effect, and includes an outer frame image portion with a gold display color and the fourth step. It contains a partial image inside the frame.

FIG. 10-9 shows an example of a presentation image display that can be changed when a story presentation is executed. The content of the progression of a series of stories in story presentation may be different as long as it corresponds to a plurality of story presentation patterns. In this way, it is sufficient if the story presentation can be performed in different presentation modes in response to a plurality of story presentation patterns. In the effect image display example shown in FIG. 10-9, the effect image that displays the display image AKH11 first is used regardless of the plurality of story effect patterns. Thereafter, in response to a plurality of story production patterns, the story is created in multiple types of production modes, including a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH21 is used and a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH22 is used. It is possible to perform the performance. After the display image AKH21 is displayed, there are cases in which a production image that displays the display image AKH31 is used, a case in which a production image that displays the display image AKH32 is used, and a display image AKH33 corresponding to a plurality of story production patterns. It is possible to perform the story performance in multiple types of performance modes, including cases where a performance image that displays a story is used. After the display image AKH22 is displayed, a plurality of cases including a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH32 is used and a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH33 is used corresponding to a plurality of story production patterns. Story production can be performed in various production modes. After the display image AKH31 is displayed, there are cases in which a production image that displays the display image AKH41 is used, a case in which a production image that displays the display image AKH42 is used, and a display image AKH43 corresponding to a plurality of story production patterns. It is possible to execute the story performance in a plurality of types of performance modes, including a case where a performance image displaying the display image AKH44 is used and a case where a performance image displaying the display image AKH44 is used. After the display image AKH32 is displayed, there are cases in which a production image that displays the display image AKH42 is used, a case in which a production image that displays the display image AKH43 is used, and a case in which a production image that displays the display image AKH44 is used in accordance with a plurality of story production patterns. It is possible to perform the story performance in multiple types of performance modes, including cases where a performance image that displays a story is used. After the display image AKH33 is displayed, a plurality of cases including a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH43 is used and a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH44 is used corresponding to a plurality of story production patterns. Story production can be performed in various production modes.

Among the display images AKH41 to AKH44, when the story effect is executed using the display image AHK44, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when the other display images AKH41 to AHK43 are used. When the story effect is executed using the display image AKH43, the expectation level of a jackpot is lower than when the display image AKH44 is used. When the story effect is executed using the display image AKH42, the expectation level of a jackpot is lower than when the display image AKH43 is used. Among display images AKH41 to AKH44, when a story effect is executed using display image AKH41, the expectation level of a jackpot is lower than when other display images AKH42 to AKH44 are used.

These post-reach performances only need to be executable during a specific period included in the reach performance as a special performance. The specific period is, for example, the period from the timing when the variable display becomes the reach state when the display mode in the variable display of the production pattern becomes the reach mode to the timing when the reach effect develops to the super reach state. Good too. Alternatively, the specific period may be a period from the timing of the ready-to-win establishment to the timing when the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed and the variable display ends. In addition, the specific period may be any period set in response to the case where the variable display is in the reach state. From the start to the end of such a specific period, the effect design can be displayed transparently according to the transparent pattern. When displaying the performance symbols in a transparent manner, the performance symbols may be displayed at different transmittances corresponding to a plurality of symbol transmission patterns. Further, when displaying the performance symbols in a transparent manner, the transmittance of the performance symbols may be made changeable in different changing modes in response to a plurality of symbol transmission patterns.

The preview effects that can be executed by the pachinko game machine 1 may include a timer effect and a timer standby effect. The timer effect can be executed in response to the start of the variable display, and it is only necessary that the remaining time from the start to the end of the effect execution can be notified in a recognizable manner. The remaining time that can be reported by the timer effect may indicate the timing at which another effect is executed, or may indicate the timing at which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the remaining time that can be reported by the timer effect may indicate the remaining time that can be executed by the timer effect itself, regardless of other effects or variable displays. Other performances whose execution timing can be suggested by the timer performance may include a jackpot expectation notification performance or a set value suggestion performance included in the reach performance, or may include an arbitrary preview performance different from the reach performance. Good too. It is possible to perform a timer standby performance that recognizably suggests that execution of the timer performance is on standby before the timing at which execution of the timer performance is started. The timing at which execution of the timer effect is started can be included in the specific timing.

For example, the timer effect is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed using a gaming random number extracted when a starting winning occurs. In cases where it is possible to determine whether or not this is the case, this is an effect that can be executed on the variable display that is the subject of the determination. The timer standby performance is an example of a pre-read preview performance, and is a performance that can be started before the variable display that is the target of determination when the timer performance is executed. The timer performance and timer standby performance are executed in one of multiple types of performance modes based on the occurrence of a starting prize, so that the display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate in the variable display of special symbols, and the jackpot game is played. It may also be possible to forewarn that the system will be controlled by the state. The performance mode of the timer standby performance includes, for example, a continuous performance mode in which the performance mode does not change from the start of the performance execution to the end, and a variable performance mode in which the performance mode changes from the start to the end of the performance execution. , contains. The timer standby effect executed in the change effect mode can be included in the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display.

FIG. 10-10 shows a plurality of display examples of effect images that can be applied to the timer standby effect and the timer effect. This effect image display example includes five display images AKJ0 to AKJ2, AKJ11, and AKJ12 as a plurality of effect images that can be applied to a timer standby effect, and four display images AKJ21 to AKJ21 as a plurality of effect images that can be applied to a timer effect. Contains AKJ24. The number of effect images that can be applied to the timer standby effect or the timer effect may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design.

FIG. 10-10(A) shows a display image AKJ0 using a performance image when a specific character includes a character image notifying a message "Not yet..." as a specific display in a timer standby performance. In the timer standby effect, when the execution of the effect is started, the display image AKJ0 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a specific display, so that the execution of the timer effect is put on standby in response to the variable display based on the starting winnings. suggests that it is. A timer standby performance executed in a production mode in which the specific display does not change is a timer standby production in a continuous production mode, and a timer standby production performed in a production mode in which the specific display changes is a timer standby production in a changing production mode. Become. In this embodiment, as a specific display, a performance image showing a specific character that includes a character image that informs a message can be displayed, and both the timer performance and the timer standby performance include a performance based on the specific display.

FIG. 10-10 (B1) shows a performance image used when a specific character includes a text image announcing a message of "plus 5 seconds", corresponding to the case where the timer standby performance is executed in a changing performance mode. The display image AKJ1 shown in FIG. FIG. 10-10 (C1) shows an effect image used when a specific character includes a text image announcing a message of "plus 15 seconds" corresponding to the case where the timer standby effect is executed in a change effect mode. The display image AKJ2 shown in FIG. When the timer standby effect is executed in a change effect mode, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 is a first change display using the display image AKJ1 and a second change display using the display image AKJ2. It is sufficient if it can be changed to either one. The timer standby effect of the change effect mode includes a specific display using the display image AKJ0, a first change display using the display image AKJ1, or a first change display using the display image AKJ2, before the variable display where execution of the timer effect is started. By changing the display to the second change display, it is possible to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display. The changing effect is not limited to changing the display image AKJ0 to either of the display images AKJ1 or AKJ2, but may be any effect that can change an arbitrary effect before the variable display that is the subject of the determination. good.

FIG. 10-10 (B2) shows a display image AKJ11 using a performance image that can be displayed separately from a specific display using display image AKJ0, corresponding to the case where the timer standby performance is executed in a continuous performance mode. It shows. FIG. 10-10 (C2) shows a display image AKJ12 using a performance image that can be displayed separately from a specific display using display image AKJ0, corresponding to the case where the timer standby performance is executed in a continuous performance mode. It shows. When the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to the first change display using the display image AKJ1 or the second change display using the display image AKJ2. There's nothing to do. On the other hand, when the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode, separate from the specific display using the display image AKJ0, the previous stage effect by displaying the display image AKJ11 or the display image AKJ12 is performed at a predetermined ratio. can be executed. The pre-stage performance is a specific display using the display image AKJ0 when the change performance is not executed because the timer standby performance in the continuous performance mode is executed before the variable display where the execution of the timer performance is started. It is sufficient if it can be executed at a predetermined rate without changing. The pre-stage effect is not limited to one using either display image AKJ11 or AKJ12, and may be a change in a specific display in response to a case where a change effect is not executed before the variable display that is the subject of determination. Any method that can be executed in an arbitrary presentation manner different from the above may be used.

FIG. 10-10(D) shows a display image AKJ21 using an effect image when a specific character includes a text image notifying a message "5 seconds left" as a specific display in a timer effect. FIG. 10-10(E) shows a display image AKJ22 using a performance image when a specific character includes a text image notifying a message "10 seconds left" as a specific display in a timer performance. FIG. 10-10(F) shows a display image AKJ23 using a performance image when a specific character includes a text image notifying a message "15 seconds left" as a specific display in a timer performance. FIG. 10-10(G) shows a display image AKJ24 using a performance image including a character image in which a specific character notifies the user of a message "20 seconds left" as a specific display in the timer performance. It is only necessary that when execution of the timer effect is started, the remaining time until the execution of the effect is completed can be notified by executing a specific display effect of displaying any of the display images AKJ21 to AKJ24. After the specific display using display images AKJ21 to AKJ24, a countdown display of the remaining time may be performed. The specific performance is not limited to a character movement performance, and may include a suspended display notice, an active display, a timer standby performance, a timer performance, and any other performance that can be executed as a pre-read notice performance. The specific display is not limited to the display of a specific character using the display image AKJ0, etc., but also includes pending display, active display, and any other display that can be displayed in advance notice performance or advance notice performance other than advance notice performance. It may be.

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing an example of a prefetch effect setting process. The pre-read effect setting process is included in the process that can be called from the effect control process process S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9(A), and can be executed in step S151 every time the effect control process process S_CPROC is executed. The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command, which is a starting opening winning command, has been received when executing the pre-read performance setting process (step AKS001). In step AKS001, for example, it is checked whether a starting opening winning designation command, a pending storage information designation command, and a winning determination result command are newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer. By doing so, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the production control command is received at the time of starting winning.

When the starting opening winning command is received (step AKS001; Yes), the contents specified by the received command are specified (step AKS002). For example, the winning determination result is specified as the content specified by the winning determination result command. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a determination restriction (step AKS003). In step AKS003, when a predetermined restriction condition for determining when winning a prize is satisfied, it is determined that there is a determination restriction. The restriction condition for winning determination is satisfied, for example, when the content specified by the winning determination result command is restricting winning determination. In addition, the limiting condition for determining when winning a prize may be satisfied, for example, when the number of pending memories is "0". In a configuration in which the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game, during the time saving period in which time saving control is being carried out to make it easier for the second special game to be executed, the time saving period is based on the occurrence of the first starting prize. When the starting opening winning command is received, the restriction condition for determining the winning time may be satisfied. To the extent that such restrictive conditions for determining when winning a prize are satisfied, if it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state will be controlled based on the variable display before the variable display starts, A limit may be set such that a performance that is a pre-read preview performance is not executed before the variable display that is the subject of the determination.

If there is no determination restriction corresponding to step AKS003 (step AKS003; No), it is sufficient if the character movement effect determination process (step AKS004) and the timer effect determination process (step AKS005) can be executed sequentially. The character movement effect determination process in step AKS004 is a process that enables decisions regarding the start of execution of character movement effects, such as whether or not to execute character movement effects, and the effect pattern when executing character movement effects. be. The timer effect determination process in step AKS005 is a process that enables decisions regarding the start of execution of the timer effect, such as whether or not to execute the timer effect, and the effect pattern when executing the timer effect.

Corresponding to step AKS003, if there is a determination restriction (step AKS003; Yes), or after executing the timer effect determination process of step AKS005, a pending display image is determined (step AKS006). The hold display image is an effect image used for hold display. Thereafter, the setting for updating the pending display at the time of starting winning is performed (step AKS007). In step AKS007, a new pending display is added so that the pending display in the pending display area AKB0 is increased by 1. In step AKS007, the hold display image determined in step AKS006 may be displayed to start a new hold display. Alternatively, in step AKS007, irrespective of the determination result in step AKS006, by first displaying the display image AKE0, a round display with a white display color, which is the normal display mode, may be performed. Thereafter, at the shift timing when the pending display is shifted as the pending memory is used up, the display may be changed to the pending display image determined in step AKS006.

If the starting opening winning command is not received in response to step AKS001 (step AKS001; No), or after step AKS007, the pending display is shifted in response to the start of a new variable display as the pending memory is consumed. It is determined whether it is the shift timing to be performed (step AKS008). If it is not the shift timing (step AKS008; No), the look-ahead effect setting process ends.

If it is the shift timing corresponding to step AKS008 (step AKS008; Yes), the character movement effect execution process (step AKS009) and the timer effect execution process (step ASK010) can be executed sequentially. good. The character movement effect execution processing in step AKS009 includes, when the character movement effect is being executed, whether or not to perform a switching suggestion effect, whether to execute a character concealment effect, whether or not to perform a character This is a process that enables decisions and controls during execution of character movement effects, such as control during execution of concealment effects. The timer effect execution process in step AKS010 is a process that enables settings related to the execution of the timer effect and timer standby effect, such as settings for executing the timer effect and settings for executing the timer standby effect.

After the timer effect execution processing in step AKS010, a pending display update setting is performed at the start of variation (step AKS011), and the pre-read effect setting process is completed. In step AKS011, the hold display in the hold display area AKB0 is decreased by 1, the display part corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased, and the hold display is exhausted, and the hold display is changed from other hold numbers "2" to "4". The pending display in the corresponding display area is moved and shifted one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. At this time, settings are made to update the active display in the active display area AKA0 in accordance with the erased pending display. Therefore, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start displaying the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area AKA0. The display of the effect image that becomes the active display may be able to inherit the display mode of the effect image in the erased pending display. In this way, the performance mode based on the active display may inherit the performance mode based on the suspended display after the start of the variable display. Data related to such prefetch effect setting processing may be stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122. An example of the use of stored data regarding the prefetch effect setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12.

The pre-reading effect setting process shown in FIGS. 10-11 makes it possible to refer to a pending display image determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121, for example, when determining a pending display image in step AKS006. In the pending display image determination table, determination values are set in advance to be compared with random numbers for determining a pending display image included in the random numbers for performance. The production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for determining a pending display image using a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to a pending display image determination table to determine the pending display image. It is possible to determine the effect image that becomes . At this time, it is sufficient as long as it is possible to determine performance images to be reserved display images at different rates in accordance with the winning determination result. Data specifying the winning determination result and the pending display image can be stored in the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 provided in a predetermined area, such as the performance control buffer setting unit of the RAM 122, for example.

FIG. 10-12(A) shows a determination example 002AKD01 of the pending display image. In the prefetch effect setting process, one of a plurality of types of pending display images can be determined in step AKS006. At this time, it is possible to determine display images that will be reserved display images at different rates in accordance with the winning determination result. Furthermore, the display images that can be determined as the pending display image may differ depending on the winning determination result. For example, when the winning determination result is one of "reach confirmed when losing", "super reach confirmed when losing", or "jackpot", the display color can be determined to be green display image AKE2 at a predetermined ratio. , when the winning determination result is "general loss", the display image AKE2 cannot be determined as the pending display image. When the winning determination result is "Super Reach Confirmed when Losing" or "Jackpot", the display color can be determined to be red display image AKE3 at a predetermined ratio, while when the winning determining result is "General when Losing" or In the case of "reach determined when losing", display image AKE3 cannot be determined as a pending display image. For example, when the winning decision result is "Jackpot", the winning probability is higher than when the winning decision result is "Super reach guaranteed when losing", "Reach confirmed when losing", or "general when losing". Then, the display image AKE3 is determined to be the pending display image. With such a setting, when a hold display using a hold display image is performed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate according to the display color, and it can be suggested that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Further, it is possible to display a pending display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet started in a plurality of display modes having different expectations for being controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 10-12(B) shows a configuration example of the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 only needs to be able to store various data for performing a pending display in the pending display area AKB0 as pending display data in response to the fact that the execution of the special figure game is pending. . The pending display data storage section 002AKM01 includes a first pending display data storage section corresponding to the pending storage display of the first special symbol game, and a second pending display data storage section corresponding to the pending storage display of the second special symbol game. may be provided. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 has a storage area reserved for storing data that specifiably indicates the winning determination result and the pending display image in association with the pending number in the pending display area AKB0, for example. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 uses a part or all of the command buffer, such as a storage area for the winning determination result command, in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer, or The first starting winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer may be configured as separate storage units. The winning determination result that can be stored in the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 indicates the determination result of the pre-read determination specified based on the winning determination result command. The pending display image that can be stored in the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 is displayed in the pending display area AKB0 based on the determination result in step AKS006, thereby recognizing the presence or absence of special drawing games that have not yet been started and the number of pending games. This is a production image that makes it possible.

FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of character movement effect determination processing. The character movement effect determination process is included in the process that can be called from the prefetch effect setting process shown in FIGS. 10-11, and can be executed in step AKS004 if there is no determination restriction corresponding to step AKS003. When executing the character movement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character movement effect flag is on (step AKS021). The character movement effect flag is set to the on state when the execution of the character movement effect is started, and is cleared and turned to the off state when the execution of the character movement effect ends. Therefore, by turning on the character movement effect flag, it is specified that the character movement effect is being executed.

If the character movement effect flag is on in response to step AKS021 (step AKS021; Yes), the character movement effect determination process ends. As a result, a limit is set such that character movement effects are not executed simultaneously or overlappingly within the range where character movement effects are being executed. By restricting a plurality of character movement performances from being executed simultaneously or overlappingly, it is possible to prevent the performances from becoming complicated and to prevent a decline in game interest. On the other hand, if the character movement effect flag is off (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not there is a character movement effect (step AKS022). At this time, either ``no character movement effect'' in which the character movement effect is not executed, or ``character movement effect present'' in which the character movement effect is executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "with character movement effect" (step ASK023).

Corresponding to step AKS023, if it is not "with character movement effect" but "without character movement effect" (step AKS023; No), the character movement effect determination process ends. On the other hand, if "character movement effect is available" (step AKS023; Yes), the movement effect type is determined (step ASK024). Furthermore, a pattern for character movement effect is determined (step AKS025). Then, character movement effect start setting is performed (step AKS026), and the character movement effect determination process ends. Data related to such character movement effect determination processing may be stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122. An example of the use of stored data regarding character movement effect determination processing will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-20.

The character movement effect processing shown in FIG. 10-13 makes it possible to refer to a character movement effect execution determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121, for example, when determining whether or not to perform a character movement effect in step AKS022. . In the character movement performance execution determination table, determination values are preset to be compared with random numbers for character movement performance execution determination included in the performance random numbers. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for character movement performance execution determination using a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character movement performance execution determination table. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform a movement effect.

The character movement effect processing shown in FIGS. 10-13 makes it possible to refer to a character movement effect type determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121, for example, when determining the movement effect type in step AKS024. In the character movement performance type determination table, determination values are preset that are compared with random numbers for character movement performance type determination included in the random numbers for performance. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for character movement performance type determination using a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character movement performance type determination table to determine the character movement performance type. The production type can be determined to be one of a plurality of types.

In the character movement effect processing shown in FIG. 10-13, for example, when determining a character movement effect pattern in step AKS025, it is possible to refer to a character movement effect pattern determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121. do. In the character movement performance pattern determination table, determination values are preset to be compared with random numbers for character movement performance pattern determination included in the performance random numbers. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that can be updated using a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122 and serves as a random number for determining a pattern for character movement performance, and refers to the pattern determination table for character movement performance. , it is possible to determine a performance pattern that will be a pattern for character movement performance. Data that specifiably indicates a performance pattern that is a pattern for character movement performance can be stored in a character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 provided in a predetermined area, such as a performance control buffer setting unit of the RAM 122, for example.

FIG. 10-14(A) shows a determination example 002AKD11 regarding the presence or absence of character movement effects. In the character movement performance determination process, it is possible to determine whether or not a character movement performance is to be performed in step AKS022. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to make different decisions regarding the presence or absence of character movement effects depending on the number of pending memories. Further, when the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than a specific number, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the character movement performance at different rates in accordance with the winning determination result. For example, when the number of pending memories is "1", the determination rate of "no" for not performing a character movement effect is 100%, and the determination rate for "yes" for performing a character movement effect is 0%. Therefore, if the number of pending memories when the starting winning occurs is "1", it is determined that the character movement effect will not be executed. In this way, a limit is set in which the character movement effect is not executed within the range where the number of pending memories is less than a specific number, that is, the number of pending memories is "1" when a starting winning occurs. To prevent the execution time of a character movement performance from becoming too short by restricting the character movement performance from being executed when the number of reserved memories is less than a specific number, and to appropriately improve the game interest by the performance. I can do it.

In the decision example 002AKD11 of FIG. 10-14(A), when the number of pending memories is one of "2" to "4", the winning determination result is "General when losing", "Reach confirmed when losing", Depending on whether it is "super reach confirmed when losing" or "jackpot", the decision rate of "no", which does not execute the character movement effect, and the decision rate of "yes", which executes the character movement effect, are determined. It's different. For example, when the winning decision result is "Jackpot", the decision rate is higher than when the winning decision result is "Super reach guaranteed when losing", "Reach confirmed when losing", or "general when losing". In this case, it is determined that the character movement effect will be executed. Further, when the winning determination result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of ``Yes'' to execute the character movement performance is higher than the determination rate of ``No'' to perform the character movement performance. When the winning decision result is "super reach guaranteed if you lose", the decision rate is lower than when the winning decision result is "jackpot", and the winning decision result is "super reach guaranteed if you lose", " ``Yes'' is determined to execute the character movement effect with a higher determination rate than when it is either ``General when losing.'' In addition, when the winning determination result is "Super Reach Confirmed when Losing", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the character movement effect is the same as the decision rate of "No" to not execute the character movement effect. rate. When the winning decision result is "Reach confirmed when you lose", the winning decision rate is lower than when the winning decision result is either "Jackpot" or "Super reach confirmed when you lose". ``Yes'' is determined to execute the character movement effect with a higher determination rate than when the result is ``General when losing.'' When the winning determination result is "general when losing", the winning probability is lower than when the winning determining result is "jackpot", "super reach guaranteed when losing", or "reach guaranteed when losing". , it is determined that the character movement effect is executed. In addition, when the winning determination result is either "Reach confirmed when losing" or "General when losing", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the character movement effect is "No" which does not execute the character movement effect. The decision rate is lower than that of . With such a setting, when the character movement performance is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, becomes higher than when the character movement performance is not performed. In addition, by using arbitrary settings, when a character movement effect is executed, the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when a character movement effect is not executed. You can. In this way, it is possible to appropriately execute the character movement performance included in the specific performance so that the player's attention to the performance of the character movement performance is increased, thereby improving the game's interest.

FIG. 10-14(B) shows a determination example 002AKD12 of the movement effect type. In the character movement effect determination process, the type of movement effect can be determined in step AKS024. In this embodiment, moving effect types RSA to RSD are prepared in advance as a plurality of moving effect types. Each of the movement effect types RSA to RSD can constitute a group of effect patterns by classifying a plurality of effect patterns that can be used as character movement effect patterns. The movement effect type RSA is configured to include a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the second pattern in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of determination. The movement performance type RSB is configured to include a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the first pattern that inherits the performance mode of the character movement performance after the variable display that is the subject of determination. The movement performance type RSC is configured to include a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the case where the character movement performance is started in the first pattern and then switched to the second pattern to perform the character movement performance. The movement performance type RSD is configured to include a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the case where the character movement performance is started in the second pattern and then switched to the first pattern to perform the character movement performance.

In the determination example 002AKD12 of FIG. 10-14(B), it is sufficient that the plurality of moving performance types RSA to RSD can be determined at different rates in accordance with the winning determination result. Furthermore, the type of movement performance that can be determined may differ depending on the winning determination result. For example, if the winning determination result is one of "Reach confirmed when losing", "Super reach confirmed when losing", or "Jackpot", the moving performance type can be determined as either RSC or RSD at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, when the winning determination result is "General when losing", it becomes impossible to determine either the movement performance type RSC or RSD. For example, when the winning decision result is "Jackpot", the winning probability is higher than when the winning decision result is "Super reach guaranteed when losing", "Reach confirmed when losing", or "general when losing". Then, the moving effect type is determined to be RSD. With such settings, when a character movement effect is executed, whether the execution of the character movement effect is started in the first pattern, the execution of the character movement effect is started in the second pattern, or the character movement effect is started in the second pattern. This is an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, depending on whether the character movement effect was executed by switching from the first pattern to the second pattern, or whether the character movement effect was executed by switching from the second pattern to the first pattern, etc. The degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state is different. In addition, when a character movement effect is executed according to an arbitrary setting, whether the execution of the character movement effect is started in the first pattern, the execution of the character movement effect is started in the second pattern, or after that, Depending on whether the character movement effect was executed by switching from the first pattern to the second pattern, or whether the character movement effect was executed by switching from the second pattern to the first pattern, etc. The degree of expectation controlled for a certain jackpot game state may be different. In this way, when a character movement effect is executed, the character movement effect included in the specific effect is appropriately executed so that the degree of attention of the player is increased as to whether the pattern is the first pattern or the second pattern. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 10-15 shows a configuration example of a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSA. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSA includes performance patterns RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-2 to RPA1-2, as a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement performance. -4, RPA1-3-3, RPA1-3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-2 to RPA2-2-4, RPA2-3-3, RPA2-3-4, RPA2-4-4 , RPA3-3-3, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, and RPA4-4-4. All of the multiple performance patterns included in the moving performance type RSA include a previous variation, which is a variable display that is executed once, and two variations, with respect to the target variation, which is a variable display that is the subject of judgment. The 2nd previous variation, which is the variable display executed before, the 3rd previous variation, which is the variable display executed 3rd time ago, and the 4th previous variation, which is the variable display executed 4th time ago. Displayable characters are specified for each. Note that the movement effect type RSA corresponds to the second pattern in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of determination. Therefore, in any of the plurality of performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSA, a character that can be displayed is not specified in response to the target variation, which is the variable display that is the subject of determination.

FIG. 10-16 shows an example of the structure of the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSB includes performance patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-1-4, RPB1-1-2 as a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement performance. -2~RPB1-1-2-4, RPB1-1-3-3, RPB1-1-3-4, RPB1-1-4-4, RPB1-2-2-2~RPB1-2-2-4 , RPB1-2-3-3, RPB1-2-3-4, RPB1-2-4-4, RPB1-3-3-3, RPB1-3-3-4, RPB1-3-4-4, RPB1 -4-4-4, RPB2-2-2-2 to RPB2-2-2-4, RPB2-2-3-3, RPB2-2-3-4, RPB2-2-4-4, RPB2-3 -3-3, RPB2-3-3-4, RPB2-3-4-4, RPB2-4-4-4, RPB3-3-3-3, RPB3-3-3-4, RPB3-3-4 -4, RPB3-4-4-4, and RPB4-4-4-4. Each of the multiple performance patterns included in the moving performance type RSB is displayed corresponding to the target variation, the 1st previous variation, the 2nd previous variation, the 3rd previous variation, and the 4th previous variation, respectively. Possible characters are specified. Note that the movement effect type RSB corresponds to the first pattern in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of determination. Therefore, in each of the plurality of performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSB, the characters that can be displayed are also specified in response to the target variation.

FIG. 10-17 shows an example of the structure of the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSC. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSC includes performance patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4, RPC1-2-2 to RPC1-2 as a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement performance. -4, RPC1-3-3, RPC1-3-4, RPC1-4-4, RPC2-2-2 to RPC2-2-4, RPC2-3-3, RPC2-3-4, RPC2-4-4 , RPC3-3-3, RPC3-3-4, RPC3-4-4, and RPC4-4-4. Each of the multiple performance patterns included in the moving performance type RSC corresponds to the 1st previous variation, 2nd previous variation, 3rd previous variation, and 4th previous variation with respect to the target variation. The characters that can be displayed are specified. Note that the movement effect type RSC corresponds to the case where after starting the execution of the character movement effect in the first pattern, the character movement effect is switched to the second pattern and executed. Therefore, in any of the plurality of performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC, a character that can be displayed in response to the target variation is not specified.

FIG. 10-18 shows an example of the structure of the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSD. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSD includes performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4, RPD1-1-2 as a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement performance. -2~RPD1-1-2-4, RPD1-1-3-3, RPD1-1-3-4, RPD1-1-4-4, RPD1-2-2-2~RPD1-2-2-4 , RPD1-2-3-3, RPD1-2-3-4, RPD1-2-4-4, RPD1-3-3-3, RPD1-3-3-4, RPD1-3-4-4, RPD1 -4-4-4, RPD2-2-2-2 to RPD2-2-2-4, RPD2-3-3-3, RPD2-3-3-4, RPD2-3-4-4, RPD2-4 -4-4, RPD3-3-3-3, RPD3-3-3-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, and RPD4-4-4-4. All of the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD are displayed corresponding to the target variation, the 1st previous variation, the 2nd previous variation, the 3rd previous variation, and the 4th previous variation, respectively. Possible characters are specified. Note that the movement effect type RSD corresponds to a case where, after starting execution of the character movement effect in the second pattern, the character movement effect is switched to the first pattern and executed. Therefore, in each of the plurality of performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD, the characters that can be displayed are also specified in response to the target variation.

In the configuration examples shown in Figures 10-14 to 10-18, for any production pattern, the characters that can be displayed in response to the 3rd previous variation and the 4th previous variation are specified by a common character. It has become something that will be done. Therefore, for example, if you start executing a character movement effect when the number of pending memories is "4" and characters are displayed corresponding to the 4th previous change and the 3rd time previous change, the common character will change. It will be displayed without. For example, if you start executing a character movement effect when the number of pending memories is "3", the character specified in response to the 4th previous change will not be displayed, and the character specified in response to the 3rd previous change will not be displayed. Display starts from the specified character. If you start executing a character movement effect when the number of pending memories is "2", the characters specified for the 4th previous change and the 3rd previous change will not be displayed, and the character specified for the 2nd previous change will not be displayed. Display starts from the character specified. For specifying the characters that can be displayed in response to the 3rd previous change and the 4th previous change, a performance pattern may be provided in which different characters are specified.

The plurality of performance patterns have different designations of characters that can be displayed in response to each variation. For example, among the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSA, the performance pattern RPA1-1-1 is such that the character CH01 is continuously displayed without changing from the 4th previous change to the 1st previous change, and the character CH01 is continuously displayed without changing. The execution of the performance ends. In addition, in the production pattern RPA1-1-2, after the character CH01 is continuously displayed without changing from the 4th previous variation to the 2nd previous variation, it can be changed to character CH02 and displayed in the 1st previous variation. After that, the execution of the character movement effect ends. In the production pattern RPA1-2-3, after the character CH01 is continuously displayed without changing in the 4th previous variation and the 3rd previous variation, it can be changed to character CH02 and displayed in the 2nd previous variation. , In the previous variation, the character CH03 can be changed and displayed, and then the execution of the character movement effect ends.

Among the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSB, the performance pattern RPB1-1-1-1 is such that character CH11 is continuously displayed without changing from the 4th previous change to the target change. Execution ends. In addition, in the production pattern RPB1-1-1-2, after the character CH11 is continuously displayed without changing from the 4th previous change to the 1st previous change, it is possible to change to character CH12 and display it in the target change. After that, the execution of the character movement effect ends. Production pattern RPB1-2-3-4 can be displayed after character CH11 is continuously displayed without changing in the 4th previous variation and the 3rd previous variation, and then changed to character CH12 in the 2nd previous variation. In the previous variation, the character CH03 can be changed and displayed, and in the target variation, the character CH04 can be changed and displayed, and then the execution of the character movement effect ends.

Among the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC, the performance pattern RPC1-1-1-1 is such that the character CH11 is continuously displayed without changing from the 4th previous variation to the start of the 2nd previous variation. Later, in the 2nd previous variation, character CH11 is switched to character CH01 and displayed, and in the 1st previous variation, character CH01 can be continuously displayed without changing, and then the execution of the character movement effect ends. . In the production pattern RPC1-1-1-2, after character CH11 is continuously displayed without changing from the fourth previous variation to the start of the second previous variation, character CH11 changes to character CH01 in the second previous variation. In the previous variation, the character CH02 can be changed and displayed, and then the execution of the character movement effect ends.

Among the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD, in the performance pattern RPD1-1-1-1, the character CH01 was continuously displayed without changing from the 4th previous variation to the start of the 2nd previous variation. Later, in the 2nd previous variation, the character CH01 is switched and displayed, and in the 1st previous variation and the target variation, the character CH11 can be continuously displayed without changing, and then the character movement effect is executed. ends. In production pattern RPD1-1-1-2, after character CH01 is continuously displayed without changing from the fourth previous variation to the start of the second previous variation, character CH01 changes to character CH11 in the second previous variation. Character CH11 can be displayed continuously without changing in the previous change, and character CH12 can be changed and displayed in the target change, and then the execution of the character movement effect ends. do. In this way, the character movement performance pattern used to execute the character movement performance is a performance pattern in which different characters can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers included in the respective codes. be.

In the plurality of performance patterns included in the moving performance type RSA, after the variable display in which the character CH01 can be displayed, any of the characters CH01 to CH04 can be displayed. After the variable display in which the character CH02 can be displayed, any of the characters CH02 to CH04 can be displayed, but the character CH01 cannot be displayed. After the variable display in which character CH03 can be displayed, it becomes possible to display either character CH03 or CH04, but it does not become possible to display character CH01 or CH02. After the variable display in which the character CH04 can be displayed, the character CH04 can be displayed, but none of the characters CH01 to CH03 can be displayed.

In the plurality of performance patterns included in the moving performance type RSB, after the variable display in which the character CH11 can be displayed, any of the characters CH11 to CH14 can be displayed. After the variable display in which the character CH12 can be displayed, any of the characters CH12 to CH14 can be displayed, but the character CH11 cannot be displayed. After the variable display in which character CH13 can be displayed, it becomes possible to display either character CH13 or CH14, but it does not become possible to display character CH11 or CH12. After the variable display in which the character CH14 can be displayed, the character CH14 can be displayed, but none of the characters CH11 to CH13 can be displayed.

The plurality of performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC is a character movement performance in which a character that can be displayed in accordance with the first pattern is switched to a character that can be displayed in accordance with the second pattern in the two previous variations. make it executable. Before changing the character in the two previous variations, the character that can be displayed in the current variable display corresponds to the character displayed in the previous variable display, similar to the multiple production patterns included in the movement production type RSB. and a character that cannot be displayed in the current variable display. After changing the character in the two previous variations, similar to the multiple production patterns included in the movement production type RSA, it becomes possible to display in the current variable display corresponding to the character displayed in the previous variable display. A character and a character that cannot be displayed in the current variable display are provided. Note that the variable display that switches the character that can be displayed according to the first pattern to the character that can be displayed according to the second pattern is not limited to the variable display that changes two times before, and performs a character movement effect. In any possible variable display, a character that can be displayed in accordance with the first pattern may be switched to a character that can be displayed in accordance with the second pattern.

The plurality of performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD is a character movement performance by switching the character that can be displayed according to the second pattern to the character that can be displayed according to the first pattern in the two previous fluctuations. make it executable. Before changing the character in the previous variation, the character that can be displayed in the current variable display corresponds to the character displayed in the previous variable display, similar to the multiple production patterns included in the movement production type RSA. and a character that cannot be displayed in the current variable display. After changing the character in the two previous variations, it becomes possible to display in the current variable display corresponding to the character displayed in the previous variable display, similar to the multiple production patterns included in the moving production type RSB. A character and a character that cannot be displayed in the current variable display are provided. Note that the variable display that switches the character that can be displayed according to the second pattern to the character that can be displayed according to the first pattern is not limited to the variable display that changes two times before, but also executes a character movement effect. In any possible variable display, a character that can be displayed in accordance with the second pattern may be switched to a character that can be displayed in accordance with the first pattern.

FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 include examples of determining performance patterns that are character movement performance patterns. In this determination example, different performance patterns can be determined in accordance with the determination result of the movement performance type. 10-19(A) shows a determination example 002AKD13 when the moving effect type is RSA, FIG. 10-19(B) shows a determining example 002AKD14 when the moving effect type is RSB, and FIG. 10-20(A) ) shows a determination example 002AKD15 when the moving effect type is RSC, and FIG. 10-20(B) shows a determination example 002AKD16 when the moving effect type is RSD. In step AKS025 of the character movement effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, one of the effect patterns included in the movement effect type determined in step AKS024 to be a pattern for character movement effect is determined. It becomes possible. In this case, there will be a loss when the winning determination result is "general when losing", "reach confirmed when losing", or "super reach confirmed when losing", and a jackpot when the winning determination result is "jackpot". It is sufficient if the performance pattern can be determined with a determination rate corresponding to and.

In the determination example 002AKD13 when the moving performance type is RSA, the determination rate of the performance pattern RPA1-1-1 is the highest in response to a loss, and the performance patterns RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-4, RPA1- 3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-4, RPA2-3-4, RPA2-4-4, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, RPA4-4-4, etc., character CH04 The determination rate of displayable performance patterns is the lowest. In the determination example 002AKD13 in the case of the moving performance type RSA, the determination rate of the performance pattern RPA1-1-1 is the highest even at the time of a jackpot. However, the decision rate is lower when you hit the jackpot than when you lose. In the determination example 002AKD13 when the moving performance type is RSA, even at the time of jackpot, the performance patterns RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-4, RPA1-3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-4, RPA2 -3-4, RPA2-4-4, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, RPA4-4-4, and other performance patterns that can display the character CH04 have the lowest determination rate. However, these decision rates are higher when you hit the jackpot than when you lose. Therefore, when a character movement effect is executed using the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSA, the case where the character CH04 is displayed is more advantageous to the player than the case where the character CH04 is not displayed. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases.

In the determination example 002AKD14 when the moving performance type is RSB, the determination rate of the performance pattern RPB1-1-1-1 is the highest in response to a loss, and the performance patterns RPB1-1-1-4, RPB1-1- 2-4, RPB1-1-3-4, RPB1-1-4-4, RPB1-2-2-4, RPB1-2-3-4, RPB1-2-4-4, RPB1-3-3- 4. Performance patterns that can display the character CH14, such as RPB1-3-4-4 and RPB1-4-4-4, are included in the performance patterns with the lowest determination rate. In the determination example 002AKD14 when the moving effect type is RSB, the effect patterns RPB2-2-2-4, RPB2-2-3-4, RPB2-2-4-4, RPB2-3-3 correspond to the jackpot. -4, RPB2-3-4-4, RPB2-4-4-4, RPB3-3-3-4, RPB3-3-4-4, RPB3-4-4-4, RPB4-4-4-4 etc., the determination rate of the performance pattern in which the character CH11 is not displayed and the character CH14 can be displayed is the highest. In the determination example 002AKD14 in the case of the moving performance type RSB, the determination rate of the performance pattern RPB1-1-1-1 becomes the lowest corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, among the cases where the character movement effect is executed with the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSB, the case where the character CH11 is not displayed and the character CH14 is displayed is better than the case where the character CH14 is not displayed and the character CH11 is The degree of expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, is higher than when the game is displayed.

In the determination example 002AKD15 for the moving performance type RSC, the performance pattern determination rate becomes 5%, which is a common determination rate, in response to a loss. In the determination example 002AKD15 when the moving performance type is RSC, in response to a jackpot, the first pattern, such as performance pattern RPC2-4-4, RPC3-3-4, RPC3-4-4, RPC4-4-4, etc. Some of the performance patterns in which character CH11 is not displayed when the character movement performance is performed in the second pattern and character CH04 can be displayed when the character movement performance is performed in the second pattern have the highest determination rate. . In the determination example 002AKD15 when the moving performance type is RSC, the performance patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4, RPC1-2-2 to RPC1-2-4, RPC1-3-3 correspond to the jackpot. , RPC1-3-4, RPC1-4-4, etc., which can display the character CH11 when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, have the lowest determination rate. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSC, character CH11 is not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, and in the second pattern. The case where the character CH04 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the character CH11 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases.

In the determination example 002AKD16 when the moving performance type is RSD, the determination rate of the performance pattern RPD2-2-2-2 is the highest in response to a loss, and the performance patterns RPD2-2-2-4, RPD2-3- 3-4, RPD2-3-4-4, RPD2-4-4-4, RPD3-3-3-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, RPD4-4-4- 4, etc., the effect pattern in which character CH01 is not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, and character CH14 can be displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, is determined by the determination rate. is the lowest. In the determination example 002AKD16 when the moving performance type is RSD, the performance patterns RPD3-4-4-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, RPD4-4-4 correspond to the jackpot. A production pattern such as -4 in which character CH01 and CH02 are not displayed when the character movement production is executed in the second pattern, but character CH14 can be displayed when the character movement production is executed in the first pattern. has the highest decision rate. In the determination example 002AKD16 when the moving performance type is RSD, the performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4, RPD1-1-2-2 to RPD1-2-2 are set in response to the jackpot. -4, RPD1-1-3-3, RPD1-1-3-4, RPD1-1-4-4, RPD1-2-2-2 to RPD1-2-2-4, RPD1-2-3-3 , RPD1-2-3-4, RPD1-2-4-4, RPD1-3-3-3, RPD1-3-3-4, RPD1-3-4-4, RPD1-4-4-4, etc. When the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the effect pattern that can display the character CH01 has the lowest determination rate. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD, character CH01 is not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, but in the first pattern. The case where the character CH14 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the character CH01 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state increases.

The first pattern is an execution pattern of a character movement performance in which the performance mode of the character movement performance before the variable display that was the target of the determination as to whether or not it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state is inherited after the variable display. be. The second pattern is an execution pattern of a character movement performance that does not inherit the performance mode of the character movement performance before the variable display that was the target of the determination as to whether or not it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state after that variable display. be. When the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when character CH04 is displayed than when character CH01 is displayed. It is only necessary that the determination rate of the presentation pattern is set. When the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the expectation of jackpot is highest when character CH04 is displayed, when character CH03 is displayed, when character CH02 is displayed, when character CH01 is displayed The determination rate of the performance pattern may be set so that the expectation level of the jackpot decreases as the number of cases displayed decreases. When the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when character CH14 is displayed than when character CH11 is displayed. It is only necessary that the determination rate of the presentation pattern is set. When the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, the expectation of jackpot is highest when character CH14 is displayed, when character CH13 is displayed, when character CH12 is displayed, when character CH11 is displayed The determination rate of the performance pattern may be set so that the expectation level of the jackpot decreases as the number of cases displayed decreases.

In the character movement effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern to be the character movement effect pattern in step ASK025, and then performs the character movement effect start setting in step AKS026. , controls the execution of the character movement effect to be started. For example, in response to the performance pattern determined in step AKS025, a performance control pattern for character movement performance prepared and stored in the ROM 121 in advance is read out. By sending an instruction to execute the effect to the display control unit 123 in accordance with the control data included in the effect control pattern, an effect image showing the character, etc. is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a character movement effect is displayed. All you have to do is start execution. When starting execution of a character movement effect, a character movement effect flag is set to an on state. In addition, the initial count value of the character display counter is set in accordance with the number of pending memories. The data that specifiably indicates the character movement effect flag and the count value of the character display counter is stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02 provided in a predetermined area, along with the data that specifiably indicates the effect pattern that is the character movement effect pattern. can be memorized.

FIG. 10-20(C) shows a configuration example of the character movement effect data storage section 002AKM02. The character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 stores a character movement performance flag, a performance pattern, a character display counter, and a concealment performance flag.The performance patterns that can be stored by the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 are for character movement performance. A performance pattern determined as a pattern is shown. The count value of the character display counter is subject to judgment by, for example, setting the number of pending memories when starting execution of a character movement effect as an initial value, and subtracting 1 each time a variable display is executed. It is sufficient if the remaining number of times until the variable display is executed can be counted. The performance control CPU 120 uses the data indicating the performance pattern and the data indicating the count value of the character display counter among the data stored in the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 to control the character to be displayed in the character movement performance. It is good if it can be specified. The data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02 includes data that specifiably indicates the concealment effect flag. The concealment effect flag is set to the ON state when the execution of the character concealment effect is started, and is cleared and turned to the OFF state when the execution of the character concealment effect ends. Therefore, by turning on the concealment effect flag, it is specified that the character concealment effect is being executed.

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing an example of timer effect determination processing. The timer effect determination process is included in the processes that can be called from the prefetch effect setting process shown in FIGS. 10-11, and can be executed in step AKS005 after the character movement effect determination process in step AKS004 is executed. When executing the timer effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timer effect flag is on (step AKS031). The timer effect flag is set to an on state when the execution of the timer standby effect is started based on the decision result to execute the timer effect, and the execution of the timer effect executed subsequent to the timer standby effect ends. Cleared and turned off. Therefore, by turning on the timer effect flag, it is specified that the timer standby effect or the timer effect is being executed.

If the timer performance flag is on in response to step ASK031 (step AKS031; Yes), the timer performance determination process ends. As a result, a limit is set that the timer standby effect or timer effect is not executed simultaneously or overlappingly within the range where the timer standby effect or timer effect is being executed. By restricting a plurality of timer standby performances and timer performances from being executed simultaneously or overlappingly, it is possible to prevent the performances from becoming complicated and to prevent a decline in game interest. On the other hand, if the timer effect flag is off (step AKS31; No), it is determined whether or not there is a timer effect (step AKS032). At this time, either ``no timer effect'', in which no timer effect is executed, or ``with timer effect'', in which a timer effect is executed, is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "with timer effect" (step AKS033).

Corresponding to step AKS033, if it is "no timer effect" instead of "with timer effect" (step AKS033; No), the timer effect determination process ends. On the other hand, if "timer effect is present" (step AKS033; Yes), a pattern for timer effect is determined (step AKS034). Furthermore, a pattern for standby performance is determined (step AKS035). Then, the timer standby performance start setting is performed (step AKS036), and the timer performance determination process ends. Data related to such timer effect determination processing may be stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122. An example of the use of data related to the timer effect determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23.

The timer performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 allows reference to a timer performance execution determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121, for example, when determining the presence or absence of a timer performance in step AKS032. In the timer performance execution determination table, determination values are preset that are compared with random numbers for determining timer performance execution included in the random numbers for performance. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for determining the timer performance execution using a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and executes the timer performance by referring to the timer performance execution determination table. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform the performance.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 allows the timer effect pattern determination table configured using the data stored in the ROM 121 to be referred to, for example, when determining the timer effect pattern in step AKS034. In the timer performance pattern determination table, determination values are preset to be compared with random numbers for timer performance pattern determination included in the performance random numbers. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is a random number for determining a pattern during timer performance that can be updated by a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the timer performance pattern determination table. It is possible to determine a performance pattern to be a performance pattern. Data that specifiably indicates the performance pattern that becomes the timer performance pattern can be stored in the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03 provided in a predetermined area, such as the performance control buffer setting unit of the RAM 122, for example.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 allows reference to the standby effect pattern determination table configured using the data stored in the ROM 121, for example, when determining the standby effect pattern in step AKS035. In the standby performance pattern determination table, a determination value is set in advance to be compared with a random number for determining a pattern during standby performance included in the random numbers for performance. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for determining a pattern during standby performance using a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the pattern determination table for standby performance. It is possible to determine a performance pattern to be a performance pattern. Data that specifiably indicates the performance pattern to be the pattern for standby performance can be stored in the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03 provided in a predetermined area, such as the performance control buffer setting unit of the RAM 122, for example.

FIG. 10-22 shows a determination example 002AKD21 regarding the presence or absence of a timer effect. In the timer performance determination process, it is possible to determine whether or not a timer performance is to be performed in step AKS032. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to make different decisions regarding the presence or absence of the timer effect depending on the number of pending memories. Further, when the number of pending memories is a specific number or more, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the timer performance at different rates in accordance with the winning determination result. Furthermore, even with a common prize-winning determination result, it may be possible to determine whether or not to perform the timer performance at different rates in response to the number of pending memories that is greater than or equal to a specific number. For example, when the number of pending memories is "1", the decision rate of "no" not to execute the timer effect is 100%, and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the timer effect is 0%. Therefore, if the number of pending memories when the starting winning occurs is "1", it is determined that the timer effect will not be executed. In this way, a limit is set in which the timer effect is not executed within the range where the number of pending memories is less than a specific number, that is, the number of pending memories is "1" when a starting winning occurs. By restricting the execution of the timer performance when the number of pending memories is less than a specific number, the execution time of the timer standby performance can be ensured and the game interest by the performance can be appropriately improved.

In decision example 002AKD21 in Figure 10-22, when the number of pending memories is one of "2" to "4", the winning judgment results are "General when losing", "Reach confirmed when losing", "When losing" Depending on whether it is "Super Reach Confirmed" or "Jackpot", the decision rate of "No", which does not execute the timer effect, and the decision rate of "Yes", which executes the timer effect, are different. In addition, even if it is a common winning judgment result, depending on whether the number of pending memories is "2" to "4", the decision rate of "None" that does not execute the timer effect and the timer effect The decision rate of "Yes" to execute may be different from the decision rate of "Yes". For example, when the winning decision result is "Jackpot", the decision rate is higher than when the winning decision result is "Super reach guaranteed when losing", "Reach confirmed when losing", or "general when losing". Then, it is decided that the timer effect will be executed. Further, when the winning determination result is a "jackpot", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is higher than the decision rate of "No" to not execute the timer effect. When the winning decision result is "super reach guaranteed if you lose", the decision rate is lower than when the winning decision result is "jackpot", and the winning decision result is "super reach guaranteed if you lose", " ``Yes'' is determined to execute the timer effect with a higher determination rate than when it is either ``General when losing''. When the winning decision result is "Reach confirmed when you lose", the winning decision rate is lower than when the winning decision result is either "Jackpot" or "Super reach confirmed when you lose". ``Yes'' is determined to execute the timer effect with a higher determination rate than when the result is ``General when losing.'' When the winning determination result is "general when losing", the winning probability is lower than when the winning determining result is "jackpot", "super reach guaranteed when losing", or "reach guaranteed when losing". , it is determined that the timer effect is executed. In addition, when the winning determination result is either "Reach confirmed when losing" or "General when losing", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is higher than the decision rate of "No" to not execute the timer effect. The decision rate is lower than the rate. With such a setting, when the timer performance is executed, the degree of expectation that the player will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player becomes higher than when the timer performance is not executed. In this way, it is possible to appropriately execute a timer effect in which a specific display is performed so that the player's attention to the execution of the timer effect is increased, thereby improving the game's interest.

In the decision example 002AKD21 of FIG. 10-22, when the winning determination result is "general when losing", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is higher than when the number of reserved memories is "4". It becomes high when the number of pending memories is "3", and is higher when the number of pending memories is "2" than when the number of pending memories is "3". Even if the winning decision result is "Reach confirmed when losing", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is higher when the number of pending memories is "3" than when the number of pending memories is "4". It becomes higher when the number of reserved memories is "2" than when the number of reserved memories is "3". When the winning judgment result is "Super reach confirmed when losing", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is higher when the number of pending memories is "3" than when the number of pending memories is "4". Furthermore, the decision rate becomes 50%, which is a common decision rate when the number of reserved memories is "3" and when it is "2". On the other hand, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is highest when the number of pending memories is "4", and the number of pending memories is "3". '', the number of pending memories is lower than when the number of pending memories is "4", and when the number of pending memories is "2", it is lower than when the number of pending memories is "3". With such a setting, it is expected that if the number of pending memories is large when it is determined to execute the timer effect, the control will be made into a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than if the number of pending memories is small. degree becomes high. In addition, depending on an arbitrary setting, if the number of pending memories is large when it is determined to execute the timer performance, the control is made to a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than when the number of pending memories is small. The level of expectation may be increased. Execution of the timer effect is started in response to the start of the variable display that is the subject of determination. The timer standby effect can be executed over a plurality of variable displays before the timing at which execution of the timer effect is started. It is more advantageous for the player to have a longer execution time for the timer standby effect in response to a large number of pending memories than to have a shorter execution time for the timer standby effect in response to a small number of pending memories. The degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state, increases. In this way, the timer standby effect and the timer effect can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the execution time of the timer standby effect is increased, thereby improving the game's interest.

FIG. 10-23(A) shows a determination example 002AKD22 of the performance pattern that becomes the timer performance pattern. In this embodiment, four performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as timer performance patterns. The number of performance patterns that can be determined as the timer performance pattern may be a plurality of patterns based on any design. The execution time of the timer effect is set to be different depending on the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4. For example, the performance pattern TPA1 has a timer performance execution time of 5 seconds, the performance pattern TPA2 has a timer performance execution time of 10 seconds, the performance pattern TPA3 has a timer performance execution time of 15 seconds, and the performance pattern TPA4 has a timer performance execution time of 15 seconds. The execution time of the timer effect is 20 seconds. Corresponding to the fact that the execution time of the timer effect is different, the period during which the specific display in the timer effect can be displayed can also be made different. For example, the specific display can be displayed for a longer period when the timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA2 than when the timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA1. The specific display can be displayed for a longer period when the timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA3 than when the timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA2. The specific display can be displayed for a longer period when the timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA4 than when the timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA3.

In step AKS034 of the timer performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, it is possible to determine any performance pattern to be a timer performance pattern from among a plurality of performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4 prepared in advance. At this time, it is only necessary that different performance patterns can be determined in response to the winning determination result being ``general when losing'', ``reach confirmed when losing'', ``super reach confirmed when losing'', and ``jackpot''. Furthermore, it may be possible to determine performance patterns at different rates depending on the winning determination result. For example, when the winning determination result is "General when losing", the determination rate of performance pattern TPA1 as a timer performance pattern is 100%, and the determination rate of performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4 is 0%. Therefore, if the winning determination result is "General when losing", performance pattern TPA1 is determined as the timer performance pattern, and performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4 are not determined. In this way, the timer performance will not be executed in a specific performance pattern within the range where the determination result is the most disadvantageous for the player in the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, where the winning determination result is "general loss". A limit is set. Further, if the winning determination result is "reach confirmed when losing", performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3 can be determined as timer performance patterns, and performance pattern TPA4 cannot be determined. In this way, a limit is set in which the timer performance is not executed in the special performance pattern within the range where the winning determination result is "reach confirmed when losing". By restricting the timer performance from being executed in a specific performance pattern or special performance pattern when the judgment result is disadvantageous to the player, the player's sense of expectation, which has been heightened by the timer performance, is less likely to decline. Thus, it is possible to appropriately execute the timer effect and improve the game's interest.

In the determination example 002AKD22 of FIG. 10-23(A), for example, when the winning determination result is "Jackpot", the winning determination results are "Super Reach Confirmed when Losing", "Reach Confirmed when Losing", and "When Losing Performance pattern TPA4 is determined as the timer performance pattern at a higher determination rate than when it is either "general". Further, when the winning determination result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of performance pattern TPA4 is higher than the determination rate of other performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3. When the winning decision result is "super reach confirmed when losing", the winning decision rate is lower than when the winning decision result is "jackpot", and also lower than the production patterns TPA1 to TPA3. Pattern TPA4 is determined. With such settings, when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, a jackpot is created which is a more advantageous situation for the player than when the timer effect is executed in any of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. The level of expectation to be controlled by the gaming state increases. In addition, depending on arbitrary settings, when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, the player is in a more advantageous state than when the timer effect is executed in any of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. The degree of expectation to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state may be increased. Performance pattern TPA4 is a performance pattern in which the timer performance execution time is the longest among the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4, and is a performance pattern that can display a specific display for the longest period. At the time of a jackpot where the winning determination result is "jackpot", the determination rate of performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3 becomes 20%, which is a common determination rate. On the other hand, in the event of a loss where the winning determination result is one of "General when losing", "Reach confirmed when losing", or "Super reach confirmed when losing", the decision rate of production pattern TPA1 will be the highest. , the decision rate of production pattern TPA2 becomes the next highest decision rate, and the decision rate of production pattern TPA3 becomes the lowest decision rate. Production pattern TPA3 is a production pattern in which the execution time of the timer production is shorter than production pattern TPA4, production pattern TPA2 is a production pattern in which the execution time of the timer production is shorter than production pattern TPA1, and production pattern TPA1 is a production pattern in which the execution time of the timer production is shorter than production pattern TPA1. This is the production pattern with the shortest execution time. Therefore, in a variable display where a timer effect is executed, it is more advantageous for the player if the specific display is displayed for a long period of time than if the specific display is displayed for a short period of time. The degree of expectation of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state increases. In this way, a timer effect in which a specific display is performed so that the player's attention is increased because the timer effect is executed in a special effect pattern and the specific display is displayed for a long period of time. By properly executing the above, it is possible to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 10-23(B) shows a determination example 002AKD23 of the performance pattern that becomes the standby performance pattern. In this embodiment, five performance patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1, and TPB2-2 are prepared in advance as a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as standby performance patterns. The number of performance patterns that can be determined as the standby performance pattern may be a plurality of patterns based on any design. The performance mode of the timer standby performance is set to be different depending on the performance patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1, and TPB2-2. For example, in the performance pattern TPB0, a timer standby performance is executed in a continuous performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change. In the effect pattern TPB1-1, the timer standby effect is executed in a change display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to the first change display using the display image AKJ1. In the effect pattern TPB1-1, the timer standby effect is executed in a change display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to the second change display using the display image AKJ2. In the performance pattern TPB2-1, a timer standby performance is executed in a continuous performance mode, and a preliminary stage performance is performed by displaying the display image AKJ11 separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0. In the performance pattern TPB2-2, a timer standby performance is executed in a continuous performance mode, and a preliminary stage performance is performed by displaying the display image AKJ12 separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0.

In step AKS035 of the timer effect determination process shown in FIG. It is possible to determine one of the performance patterns. At this time, it is only necessary that a different performance pattern can be determined in accordance with the result of determining the performance pattern to be the timer performance pattern in step AKS034. Furthermore, it may be possible to determine performance patterns that will become standby performance patterns at different rates in response to the determination results of performance patterns that will become timer performance patterns. For example, when performance pattern TPA1 is determined as a timer performance pattern, any of performance patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB2-1 can be determined as a standby performance pattern, and performance patterns TPB1-2, TPB2- 2 is not determined. When the performance pattern TPA2 is determined as the timer performance pattern, any of the performance patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB2-1 can be determined as the standby performance pattern, and the performance patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2-2 are Not determined. When production pattern TPA3 is determined as the timer production pattern, production patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2-1 can be determined as the standby production pattern, and production patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB2-2 are Not determined. When production pattern TPA4 is determined as the timer production pattern, production patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 can be determined as the standby production pattern, and production patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB1-2 are Not determined.

Production pattern TPB0 is determined as the standby production pattern with the highest determination rate when the timer production pattern is production pattern TPA1, and is moreover determined as the standby production pattern with the highest determination rate when the timer production pattern is production pattern TPA2 to TPA4. is also determined as a standby effect pattern with a high determination rate. Production pattern TPB1-1 is determined as a standby production pattern with a higher determination rate when the timer production pattern is production pattern TPA2 than when the timer production pattern is production pattern TPA1. If the pattern for use is either the production pattern TPA3 or TPA4, it is not determined as the pattern for standby production. Production pattern TPB1-2 is determined as the standby production pattern with the highest determination rate when the timer production pattern is production pattern TPA3, while the timer production pattern is determined to be one of production patterns TPA1, TPA2, and TPA4. In this case, it is not determined as a pattern for standby effect. Production pattern TPB2-1 is determined as the standby production pattern with the highest determination rate when the timer production pattern is production pattern TPA2, and the timer production pattern is one of production patterns TPA1, TPA3, and TPA4. The pattern for standby performance is determined at a higher determination rate than in the case where Performance pattern TPB2-2 is determined as the standby performance pattern with the highest determination rate when the timer performance pattern is performance pattern TPA4, while the timer performance pattern is any of the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3. In some cases, it is not determined as a pattern for standby production. With these settings, when the timer standby effect is executed in either of the effect patterns TPB1-1 or TPB1-2, the timer effect is executed more easily than when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0. It tends to take a long time. Therefore, the specific display in the timer effect is better when the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is executed in the change effect mode than when the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is not executed in the continuous effect mode. It can be displayed over a long period of time. In addition, when the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode and the previous stage effect is executed without the change effect, it is more effective than when the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is executed in the change effect mode. , it may be possible to display a specific performance in a timer performance for a long period of time. In this way, even if the timer standby effect is not executed in the changing effect mode and the specific display does not change, the anticipation for the timer effect is increased by executing the pre-stage effect, so there is no surprise when the specific display does not change. It is possible to improve the game's interest by appropriately executing change performances and pre-stage performances so as to increase the performance.

In the timer performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern to be the timer performance pattern in step AKS035, and then performs the timer standby performance start setting in step AKS036. Set to enable execution of standby effects. For example, in response to the performance pattern determined in step AKS035, a performance control pattern for a timer standby performance that is previously stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is read out. By sending an instruction to execute the effect to the display control unit 123 in accordance with the control data included in this effect control pattern, display image AKJ1 or the like is displayed as a specific display including a specific character on the screen of the image display device 5. , it is sufficient to start executing the timer standby effect. When starting execution of a timer standby effect, a timer effect flag is set to an on state. Further, the initial count value of the remaining number of times counter is set corresponding to the number of pending memories. Data that specifiably indicates the count value of the timer effect flag and the remaining number of times counter is stored in a timer effect data storage section provided in a predetermined area, along with data that specifiably indicates the effect pattern that is the timer effect pattern or the standby effect pattern. 002AKM03.

FIG. 10-23(C) shows an example of the configuration of the timer effect data storage section 002AKM03. The timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03 has a storage area for storing data that specifiably indicates a timer performance flag, a timer performance pattern, a standby performance pattern, and a remaining number of times counter. The timer effect pattern that can be stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 indicates the effect pattern determined as the timer effect pattern. The standby effect pattern that can be stored by the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 indicates the effect pattern determined as the standby effect pattern. For example, the count value of the remaining number of times counter is set as the initial value of the number of pending memories when starting the execution of the timer standby effect, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. It is sufficient if it is possible to count the remaining number of times until the display is executed.

FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing during execution of character movement effect. The character movement effect execution process is included in the process that can be called from the prefetch effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, and can be executed in step ASK009 when it is the shift timing corresponding to step AKS008. . The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character movement performance flag is on when executing the character movement performance execution process (step ASK041). If the character movement effect flag is off (step ASK041; No), the character movement effect execution process ends, corresponding to the fact that the character movement effect is not being executed.

If the character movement effect flag is on in response to step AKS041 (step AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether the concealment effect flag is on (step ASK042). If the concealment effect flag is off (step AKS042; No), it is determined whether or not there is a character concealment effect (step AKS043). At this time, either ``no character concealment effect'' in which the character concealment effect is not executed, or ``character concealment effect present'' in which the character concealment effect is executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "with character concealment effect" (step ASK044). In the case of "character concealment effect" (step AKS044; Yes), character concealment effect start setting is performed (step AKS045), and the character movement effect execution process ends. The character concealment performance start setting includes a setting for starting the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment performance, overlapping the display position of the character in the character movement performance. Thereby, it is possible to start executing a character concealment effect as a special effect that makes the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, invisible.

If the concealment effect flag is on in response to step AKS042 (step AKS042; Yes), character concealment control is determined (step ASK046). At this time, "continuation of concealment" continues the character concealment performance, "restart display" terminates the character concealment performance and restarts the display in the character movement performance, and "display resume" terminates the character concealment performance and resumes the display in the character movement performance. ``Display End'' is determined. Then, it is determined whether this determination result is "continuation of concealment" (step AKS047). If "concealment continues" (step AKS047; Yes), the character movement effect execution process ends.

If it is not "continuation of concealment" in response to step AKS047 (step AKS047; No), it is determined whether the determination result in step AKS046 is "resume display" (step AKS048). If it is "display restart" (step AKS048; Yes), character movement effect restart setting is performed (step AKS049). The character movement performance restart setting includes a setting for terminating the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment performance that has been performed overlapping the display position of the character in the character movement performance. As a result, it is possible to end the execution of the character concealment performance as a special performance that makes the character movement performance that is the specific performance invisible, and restart the character movement performance that is the specific performance.

If it is not "restart display" in response to step AKS048 (step AKS048; No), and the determination result in step AKS046 is "end display", the character movement effect is set to end (step AKS050), and the character movement The performance execution process ends. The character movement performance end setting includes a setting to end the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment performance and a setting to end the execution of the character movement performance. For example, the data stored in the character movement effect data storage section 002AKM02 is cleared and initialized. Thereby, it is possible to end the execution of the character hiding performance as a special performance that makes the character movement performance that is the specific performance invisible, and to end the character movement performance that is the specific performance without restarting it.

Corresponding to step AKS044, if it is "without character concealment effect" instead of "with character concealment effect" (step AKS044), or after character movement effect restart setting is made in step AKS049, it is determined whether or not there is a switching suggestion effect. (Step AKS051). At this time, either "no switching suggestion performance" in which the switching suggestion performance is not executed, or "switching suggestion performance present" in which the switching suggestion performance is executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "with switching suggestion effect" (step AKS052). In the case of "no switching suggestion effect" instead of "switching suggestion effect" (step ASK052; No), the character movement effect execution process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "switching suggestion effect" (step AKS052; Yes), the switching suggestion effect execution setting is performed (step AKS053), and the character movement effect execution process ends. An example of the use of the stored data regarding the process during execution of character movement effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-25.

In the character movement effect execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, for example, when determining whether or not to perform a character concealment effect in step AKS043, it is possible to refer to a character concealment effect execution determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121. Make it. In the character concealment performance execution determination table, determination values are preset that are compared with random numbers for character concealment performance execution determination included in the performance random numbers. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for character concealment performance execution determination using a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character concealment performance execution determination table. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform a concealment effect.

The character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24 is such that when determining character concealment control in step AKS046, for example, it is possible to refer to a character concealment control determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121. do. In the character concealment control determination table, determination values are set in advance to be compared with random numbers for character concealment control determination included in the random numbers for performance. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for character concealment control determination using a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character concealment control determination table. It is possible to determine the control content to be controlled during concealment.

In the character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24, for example, when determining whether or not to perform a switching suggestion effect in step AKS051, it is possible to refer to a switching suggestion effect execution determination table configured using data stored in the ROM 121. Make it. In the switching suggestion performance execution determination table, a determination value is set in advance to be compared with a random number for switching suggestion performance execution determination included in the random number for performance. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is an updatable random number for determining the execution of a switching suggestion performance using a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the switching suggestion performance execution determination table. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform a suggestive effect. In addition, when the movement effect type is either RSC or RSD, it may be determined to always execute the switching suggestion effect in response to the execution of the variable display that changes two times before. On the other hand, when the movement effect type is either RSA or RSB, it is determined whether or not to perform the switching suggestion effect at a predetermined rate in response to the execution of the variable display that changes two times before. may be done. With such settings, it is possible to switch between the case where the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern and the case where the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. A switching suggestion performance is executed, and a fake performance or a switching failure performance in which a switching suggestion performance is executed in response to executing a character movement performance without switching can be executed.

FIG. 10-25(A) shows a determination example 002AKD31 regarding the presence or absence of a character concealment effect. In the character movement performance execution process, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a character concealment performance in step AKS043. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the character concealment performance at different rates depending on the currently displayed character, which is the character displayed in the character movement performance. In decision example 002AKD31, the decision rate of "No" which does not execute the character concealment effect is 80%, and the decision rate of "Yes" which does not execute the character concealment effect is 80%, corresponding to the displayed character being one of the characters CH01 to CH04. ” has a decision rate of 20%. In addition, in response to the character being displayed being one of the characters CH11 to CH14, the decision rate of "no" which does not execute the character concealment effect is 70%, and the decision rate of "yes" which executes the character concealment effect is 70%. The rate is 30%.

The display images of characters CH01 to CH04 are displayed when performing a character movement effect using the second pattern in the case of no inheritance, which does not inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination. Applicable. The display images of characters CH11 to CH14 are the first pattern when the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination. Applicable. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, the character concealment effect is executed at a higher rate than when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. When a character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, if a switching suggestion effect is executed, there is a possibility that the character movement effect will be executed by switching to the first pattern. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the player is likely to expect that the switching suggestion effect will be executed, and the player will also have a high sense of anticipation when the switching suggestion effect is executed. It's easy to get caught. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the character concealment effect can be executed at a low rate, thereby increasing attention and expectations for the switching suggestion effect and improving the enjoyment of the game. I can do it.

Note that the character concealment effect may be executed when a preset concealment permission condition is satisfied, and may not be executed when the concealment permission condition is not satisfied. For example, if the count value of the character display counter is "2" and a variable display that changes two times before is executed, the concealment permission condition will not be met and the character concealment effect will not be executed. Limits may be set. During execution of the variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes twice corresponding to "2", a switching suggestion effect may be executed to switch between the first pattern and the second pattern. In this case, if the character concealment performance is executed simultaneously or overlappingly with the switching suggestion performance, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestion performance. Therefore, within the range of the variable display in which the switching suggestion effect can be executed, a limit may be set such that the character concealment effect is not executed simultaneously or overlappingly. By restricting the character concealment performance from being executed simultaneously or overlappingly with the switching suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestion performance and improve the game enjoyment.

The presence or absence of the character concealment effect may be determined at different determination rates depending on which of the characters CH01 to CH04 the character being displayed is. The presence or absence of the character concealment effect may be determined at different determination rates depending on which of the characters CH11 to CH14 is the character being displayed. For example, the determination rate is set so that when the displayed character is character CH01 or character CH11, the character concealment effect is executed at a higher rate than when the displayed character is character CH04 or character CH14. Good too. In the character movement performance, the determination rate of the performance pattern is set so that when character CH04 or character CH14 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when character CH01 or character CH11 is displayed. It would be fine if it had been done. Further, the display of the character CH04 and the character CH14 does not change to the display of other characters in the character movement effect. Therefore, when the displayed character is a character that is difficult to change, such as character CH04 or character CH14, a character concealment effect is performed more easily than when the displayed character is a character that changes easily, such as character CH01 or character CH11. The determination rate may be set so that the rate of determination is low. In this way, to the extent that the performance mode of the character movement effect is a specific mode that is difficult to change, the rate at which the character becomes invisible due to execution of the character concealment effect is reduced compared to when the performance mode of the character movement effect is other than the specific mode. A limit may be set. Alternatively, a limit may be set such that the character concealment effect will not be performed and the character will not become invisible within the range where the effect mode of the character movement effect is an unchanged effect mode. Thereby, when the character concealment effect is executed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the change in the effect mode of the character movement effect, and to improve the interest in the game.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the character concealment performance in step AKS043 of the character movement performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs character concealment performance in step AKS045 in response to the determination result of "character concealment performance" in step AKS044. By setting the concealment performance start, it is controlled so that execution of the character concealment performance can be started. For example, in response to a character concealment performance, a performance control pattern for character concealment performance that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is read out. By sending a performance execution instruction to the display control unit 123 in accordance with the control data included in this performance control pattern, a concealment display CK01 is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and execution of the character concealment performance is started. Just let it happen. When starting execution of character concealment performance, a concealment performance flag is set to an on state. Data that specifiably indicates the concealment effect flag can be stored in the character movement effect data storage section 002AKM02.

FIG. 10-25(B) shows a determination example 002AKD32 of character concealment control. In the character movement effect execution process, character concealment control can be determined in step AKS046. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the character concealment performance at different ratios corresponding to the hidden character, which is the character hidden in the character concealment performance. Similarly to the characters displayed in the character movement effect, the hidden character uses data indicating the effect pattern and data indicating the count value of the character display counter among the data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02. It is sufficient if it can be identified by In decision example 002AKD32, the decision rate for "Continue Concealment" to continue the character concealment performance is 30%, corresponding to the character being hidden being one of CH01 to CH04, and the character concealment performance is ended and the character The decision rate for "restart display" which restarts the display of the character in the movement performance is 20%, and the decision rate for "end display" which ends the display of the character in the character movement performance when the character concealment performance ends is 50%. . In addition, in response to the fact that the character being hidden is one of the characters CH11 to CH14, the decision rate for "Continue Concealment" to continue the character concealment performance is 20%, and the character movement performance ends when the character concealment performance is completed. The decision rate for ``display resume'', which restarts the character display, is 70%, and the decision rate for ``display end'', which terminates the character display in the character movement effect at the same time as the character concealment effect ends, is 10%.

The display images of characters CH01 to CH04 are displayed when performing a character movement effect using the second pattern in the case of no inheritance, which does not inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination. Applicable. The display images of characters CH11 to CH14 are the first pattern when the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination. Applicable. Therefore, it is better to hide the character when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern and become invisible when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. To end a character concealment performance and restart display of a character in a character movement performance at a higher rate than when the character becomes invisible due to execution of the concealment performance. In addition, if a character concealment effect is executed and the character becomes invisible while the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, it is better to hide the character when the character movement effect is being executed in the first pattern. When the character concealment performance ends, the character display in the character movement performance also ends at a higher rate than when the character becomes invisible due to the execution of the concealment performance. In this way, if the character concealment effect, which is a special effect, is executed after starting the execution of the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, in the first pattern, and the character becomes invisible, the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, is restarted. It is possible. On the other hand, if the character concealment effect, which is a special effect, is executed after starting the execution of the character movement effect, which is a special effect, in the second pattern, and the character becomes invisible, the character movement effect, which is a special effect, is restarted. It is possible to exit without

When the character hiding control is determined to be "display restart" in step AKS046 of the character movement performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs the character movement performance restart setting in step AKS049 in response to the determination result in step AKS048. By doing so, the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment performance is ended, and the character display in the character movement performance is controlled to be resumed. For example, the character concealment control sends an instruction to execute a pre-prepared effect to the display control unit 123 in response to "display restart", so that the concealment display CK01 is erased on the screen of the image display device 5, and the character What is necessary is to restart the display of the character in the moving performance. The character to be displayed in the character movement effect can be specified by using data indicating the effect pattern and data indicating the count value of the character display counter among the data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02. good. Furthermore, when finishing the execution of the character concealment effect, the concealment effect flag is cleared and turned off. The character displayed in the character movement effect when the execution of the character concealment effect is finished will be a different character from the character displayed when the character concealment effect is executed and becomes invisible after the execution of the character movement effect has started. There are cases. For example, after starting the execution of the character movement effect in the effect pattern RPB1-2-3-4 included in the movement effect type RSB shown in FIG. When the character hiding effect is executed, the display of the character CH11 becomes invisible. In this case, when the execution of the character concealment effect ends and the character display in the character movement effect is restarted in response to the start of the variable display that changes two times before, the character CH12, which is different from the character CH11, is displayed. will be resumed. In this way, if a character concealment effect is executed as a special effect after starting execution of a character movement effect as a specific effect in the first pattern and the character becomes invisible, the first pattern with a different effect mode It may be possible to restart the character movement performance that is a specific performance.

Note that the character concealment performance may be controlled so that the performance execution ends when a preset concealment end condition is satisfied, independently of the determination rate of the character concealment control. For example, after starting execution of a character movement effect using a performance pattern included in either movement effect type RSC or RSD, if a character concealment effect is executed and the character becomes invisible, the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2", even if a limit is set that the concealment end condition is satisfied and the execution of the character concealment effect is terminated in the range in which variable display with two previous fluctuations is executed. good. During execution of the variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes twice corresponding to "2", a switching suggestion effect may be executed to switch between the first pattern and the second pattern. In this case, if the character concealment performance is executed simultaneously or overlappingly with the switching suggestion performance, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestion performance. Therefore, within the range of the variable display that executes the switching suggestion effect and switches between the first pattern and the second pattern, a limit is set in order to prevent the character concealment effect from being executed at the same time or overlappingly. Good too. By restricting the character concealment performance from being executed simultaneously or overlappingly with the switching suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestion performance and improve the game enjoyment.

The concealment end condition may be satisfied when the variable display that changes once before is executed in response to the count value of the character display counter being "1". In this way, if a character concealment effect is executed and the character becomes invisible after the execution of the character movement effect has started, the count value of the character display counter will correspond to "1" and the previous change will be displayed. In the range in which the variable display is executed, a limit may be set such that the concealment end condition is satisfied and the execution of the character concealment effect is ended. For variable displays where the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "1" and changes from the previous time, the performance mode of the character movement performance can be inherited from the next variable display in the first pattern, or it can be changed to the second pattern. This is a turning point in determining whether or not to inherit the performance mode of the character movement performance after the next variable display. In this case, if the character concealment effect is executed and the character movement effect becomes invisible, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the character movement effect. Therefore, a limit may be set to terminate the character concealment effect so that it is not performed within a range of variable display that branches to inherit or not inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect. By restricting the execution of the character concealment effect in a variable display that branches to inherit or not inherit the performance mode of the character movement effect, the player's attention to the character movement effect is increased and the interest in the game is improved. be able to.

When the character hiding control is determined to be "display end" in step AKS046 of the character movement performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs the character movement performance end setting in step AKS050 in response to the determination result in step AKS048. By doing so, the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment performance is terminated, and the display of the character in the character movement performance is also controlled to be terminated. For example, when the character hiding control sends an instruction to end a pre-prepared effect to the display control unit 123 in response to "display end", the hidden display CK01 is erased on the screen of the image display device 5, and The display of the character in the character movement effect may also be erased. When finishing the execution of the character movement effect together with the character concealment effect, the stored data in the character movement effect data storage section 002AKM02 may be cleared and initialized.

FIG. 10-25(C) shows a decision example 002AKD33 regarding the presence or absence of the switching suggestion effect. In the character movement performance execution process, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a switching suggestion performance in step AKS051. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the switching suggestion performance at different rates in accordance with the currently displayed character, which is the character displayed in the character movement performance. In decision example 002AKD33, corresponding to the fact that the character being displayed is character CH01, the decision rate of "No" to not execute the switching suggestion effect is 90%, and the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the switching suggestion effect is 90%. It is 10%. Corresponding to the fact that the character being displayed is character CH02, the determination rate of "no" for not performing the switching suggestion performance is 85%, and the determination rate for "yes" for performing the switching suggestion performance is 15%. Corresponding to the fact that the currently displayed character is character CH03, the decision rate of "no" for not performing the switching suggestion performance is 75%, and the decision rate for "yes" for performing the switching suggestion performance is 25%. Corresponding to the fact that the currently displayed character is character CH04, the determination rate of "no" for not performing the switching suggestion performance is 60%, and the determination rate for "yes" for performing the switching suggestion performance is 40%.

Note that in response to the character being displayed being one of the characters CH11 to CH14, "none" may be determined so that the switching suggestion effect is not executed. The display images of characters CH01 to CH04 are displayed when performing a character movement effect using the second pattern in the case of no inheritance, which does not inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination. Applicable. The display images of characters CH11 to CH14 are the first pattern when the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination. Applicable. Therefore, by executing the switching suggestion effect at a predetermined rate while the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, it is possible to suggest that switching to the first pattern is possible. When a character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, if a switching suggestion effect is executed, there is a possibility that the character movement effect will be executed by switching to the first pattern. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the player is likely to expect that the switching suggestion effect will be executed, and the player will also have a high sense of anticipation when the switching suggestion effect is executed. It's easy to get caught. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the switching suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate, thereby increasing attention and expectations for the switching suggestion effect and improving the enjoyment of the game. I can do it.

The switching suggestion performance may become executable when a preset switching suggestion condition is satisfied. For example, if the count value of the character display counter is "2" and a variable display that changes two times before is executed, even if the switching suggestion condition is satisfied and the switching suggestion performance is made possible. good. During execution of variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes two times corresponding to "2", the first pattern and the second pattern may be switched. In this case, by executing the switching suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching of the performance mode in the character movement performance and improve the interest in the game.

The switching suggestion condition is that after starting execution of the character movement effect in the effect pattern included in either movement effect type RSC or RSD, the count value of the character display counter is "2", and the change is made two times before. It may be established when a variable display that changes is executed. After starting execution of a character movement effect using a performance pattern included in either movement effect type RSC or RSD, execution of a variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes two times before corresponding to "2". Inside, the first pattern and the second pattern are switched. In this case, by executing the switching suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching of the performance mode in the character movement performance and improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, after starting execution of the character movement effect using the effect pattern included in either movement effect type RSA or RSB, the count value of the character display counter changes 2 times before, corresponding to "2". When a variable display is executed, the switching suggestion performance may be made executable at a predetermined rate, such as determining whether or not the switching suggestion performance is to be performed based on a determination rate as in decision example 002AKD33. In this way, when the first pattern and the second pattern are switched after starting execution of the character movement effect, the switching suggestion effect can always be executed, and the first pattern and the second pattern cannot be switched. In other cases, the switching suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined rate and may not be executed at a predetermined rate. Thereby, when the switching suggestion performance is executed, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the performance mode in the character movement performance is to be switched, thereby improving the interest in the game.

FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer effect execution process. The timer effect execution process is included in the processes that can be called from the prefetch effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, and can be executed in step AKS010 after the character movement effect execution process in step AKS009 is executed. be. The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timer performance flag is on when executing the timer performance execution process (step AKS061). When the timer effect flag is off (step AKS061; No), corresponding to the fact that neither the timer effect nor the timer standby effect is being executed, the timer effect execution process ends.

If the timer effect flag is on in response to step AKS061 (step AKS061; Yes), it is determined whether or not the timer effect target variation has started (step AKS062). Step AKS062 updates the count value of the remaining number of times counter stored in the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03, for example, by subtracting one. At this time, if the count value of the remaining number of times counter is "0" after the update, it is determined that the timer effect target variation has started. On the other hand, if the count value of the remaining number of times counter is other than "0" after the update, it is determined that the timer effect target variation has not started.

Corresponding to step AKS062, if the timer effect target change starts (step AKS062; Yes), timer effect execution settings are performed (step AKS063), and the timer effect execution process ends.

Corresponding to step AKS062, if the timer effect object variation has not started (step AKS062; No), a timer standby effect execution setting is performed (step AKS064), and the timer effect execution process ends.

FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the production symbol variation start process. The production symbol fluctuation start process is included in the process that can be called from the production control process process S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9(A), and when the production control process code loaded in step S153 is 01[H], It can be executed in step S155. The performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. when performing the performance symbol variation start process (step ASK101). The production control CPU 120 displays the final stop symbol based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. All you have to do is decide. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are the fluctuation pattern settings included in the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL whose special symbol process code corresponds to 00[H] in step S112 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. When the process is executed, the command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by setting the command to be sent at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol. The variation pattern designation command is a production control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination and the random number MR2-1 for the winning symbol. As an example, the variable display contents depending on the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", "non-probable variable (jackpot)", and "probable variable (jackpot)". Good to have.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", different (inconsistent) performance symbols are determined as the final stop symbols in the "left" and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5R. When the variable display content is "reach (lose)", the same (matching) performance symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5R. In this case, the medium-determined performance symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” performance symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 among the confirmed performance symbols is determined to be a different performance symbol from the left and right determined performance symbols. be done. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)" or "probable change (jackpot)," the same ( The matching) production symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probable variable (jackpot)" or "probable variable (jackpot)" and whether or not a jackpot promotion effect is executed, the normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It is only necessary to decide which one of the performance symbols (showing a performance symbol) and the variable probability symbol (for example, a performance symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the determined performance symbol. In the jackpot promotion performance, a combination of performance symbols that evokes a jackpot but does not evoke a probability variable state (non-probability variable jackpot combination) is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, and then is displayed during a jackpot game state or during a jackpot game state. This is an effect that informs whether or not the probability change state will occur at the end of the period. When the variable display content is "non-probable variation (jackpot)", one of the plural types of normal symbols is determined to be a fixed performance symbol. Further, when the variable display content is ``probability change (jackpot)'' and it is decided not to perform the promotion performance during jackpot, the one to be the confirmed performance pattern is determined from among the plurality of types of probability change symbols. On the other hand, even if the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", when it is decided to execute a promotion performance during a jackpot, a pattern to be a fixed performance pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Thereby, even though the probability-variable symbols are derived and displayed as confirmed performance symbols, promotion performance during a jackpot is prevented from being executed, so as not to give a sense of distrust to the player.

If the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probable variable (jackpot)", a decision may be made as to whether to execute a variable probability promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a jackpot. . In the re-lottery performance, if the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probable variable (jackpot)", it is decided whether to execute a variable-probability promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a jackpot. May be done. In the re-lottery performance, once a performance symbol of a non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the production symbol, it is difficult or impossible to recognize that the variable probability state is controlled. By displaying performance symbols variably (re-fluctuation) again and stop displaying performance symbols of a probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols, it is possible to inform the player that the game is controlled to be in a probability variable state. In addition, after the performance symbols are changed again in the re-lottery performance, the performance symbols of the non-probability variable jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, so that the control to the probability variable state may not be notified. When it is decided to perform a re-lottery performance, the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed before the execution of the re-lottery performance is temporarily made difficult or unrecognizable, and the performance symbols are variably displayed (re-displayed again). The game player can be visually informed that the game is controlled to a variable probability state by causing the performance symbols of a variable probability jackpot combination consisting of the same variable probability symbols to be stopped and displayed. In addition, after the performance symbols are changed again in the re-lottery performance, the performance symbols of the non-probability variable jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, so that the control to the probability variable state may not be notified. When it is determined to perform the re-lottery performance, the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before executing the re-lottery performance.

After determining the final stop symbol etc. in step AKS101, it is determined whether or not there will be an active display change effect (step AKS102). At this time, either ``no active display change effect'' is determined, in which the active display change effect is not executed, or ``active display change effect is present'', in which the active display change effect is executed. Then, it is determined whether this determination result is "with active display change effect" (step AKS103). If "active display change effect is present" (step AKS103; Yes), a pattern for active display change effect is determined (step AKS104).

Corresponding to step AKS103, if it is "without active display change effect" instead of "with active display change effect" (step AKS103; No), or after determining the pattern for active display change effect in step AKS104, super reach It is determined whether or not there is a "super reach" to execute a reach effect (step AKS105). Whether or not to execute a reach effect that becomes a super reach can be determined in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. In step AKS105, it is determined whether it is "with super reach" in which a reach effect resulting in a super reach is executed, or "without super reach" in which a reach effect resulting in a super reach is not executed. Then, in the case of "super reach" (step AKS105; Yes), a post-reach performance is determined (step AKS106).

Corresponding to step AKS105, in the case of "no super reach" instead of "with super reach" (step AKS105; No), after determining the post-reach performance in step AKS106, the performance control pattern is set to multiple patterns prepared in advance. (Step AKS107). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of production control patterns prepared as a special figure variation production control pattern in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the pattern to be used. do. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the plurality of performance control patterns prepared as the active display change performance control pattern in response to the determination result of the pattern for active display change performance in step AKS104, and sets it as the pattern to be used. You may. Corresponding to the determination result of the after-reach performance in step AKS106, one of a plurality of performance control patterns prepared as the after-reach performance control pattern may be selected and set as the pattern to be used. In addition, separate performance control patterns may be set as performance control patterns corresponding to the special figure change performance control pattern, active display change performance control pattern, after-reach performance control pattern, and other various performances, or for each performance. One effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings may be set.

When the production control pattern is determined in step AKS107, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area, such as the production control timer setting section of the RAM 122, is set in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, for example. is set (step AKS108). Then, settings are made to start changing the effect symbols and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS109). At this time, for example, the display list and individual drawing commands specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern such as the special figure variation production control pattern determined in step AKS107 may be supplied to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Therefore, it is sufficient to start changing the effect symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the production control process code is updated to 02[H], which is a value corresponding to the process during production symbol variation (step AKS110), and the production symbol variation start process is completed.

FIG. 10-28(A) shows a determination example 002AKD51 regarding the presence or absence of the active display change effect. In the performance symbol variation start process, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the active display change performance in step AKS104. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the active display change performance at different rates in accordance with the variable display content. In decision example 002AKD51, in response to the variable display content being "non-reach (lose)", the decision rate of "none" is 99%, which does not execute the active display change effect, and the active display change effect is executed. The decision rate of “Yes” is 1%. Corresponding to the variable display content being "Reach (Lose)", the decision rate of "No" to not execute the active display change effect is 50%, and the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the active display change effect. is 50%. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display content is "non-probable variation (jackpot)", the decision rate of "no" not to execute the active display change effect is 25%, and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the active display change effect is 25%. The rate is 75%. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display content is "Probable Variation (Jackpot)", the decision rate of "No" to not execute the active display change effect is 20%, and the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the active display change effect. is 80%. With such a setting, when the active display change performance is executed, the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the active display change performance is not executed. Become. In addition, through arbitrary settings, when the active display change performance is executed, the expectation level is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than when the active display change performance is not executed. It may be made higher. In this way, it is possible to appropriately execute the active display change performance included in the change performance so that the player's attention to the execution of the active display change performance is increased, thereby improving the game's interest.

FIG. 10-28(B) shows a determination example 002AKD52 of a performance pattern that becomes an active display change performance pattern. In this embodiment, four effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as active display change effect patterns. The number of effect patterns that can be determined as the active display change effect pattern may be a plurality of patterns based on an arbitrary design. The performance mode of the active display change performance is set to be different depending on the performance patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2.

FIG. 10-28(C) shows a configuration example of production patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 that can be determined as patterns for active display change production. The pre-change display corresponding to each performance pattern shows the display mode of the active display displayed before the active display change performance is executed. The production patterns YAP1-1 and YAP1-2 correspond to a production mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed once in the active display change production. The production patterns YAP2-1 and YAP2-2 correspond to a production mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed twice in the active display change production. The production pattern YAP1-1 sets the final display mode of the active display as a display image AKE11 that notifies the message "?", and the production patterns YAP1-2 and YAP2-1 set the final display mode of the active display as "chance". The display image AKE12 is set to notify the message ``Very hot'', and the final display mode of the effect pattern YAP2-2 is set as the display image AKE13 to notify the message ``Very hot''.

In the decision example 002AKD52 in Figure 10-28(B), the variable display contents correspond to "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability variation (jackpot)", and "probability variation (jackpot)". , it would be good if it were possible to determine different performance patterns. Furthermore, it may be possible to determine performance patterns at different rates in response to variable display contents. For example, when the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", the determination rate of production pattern YAP1-1 as the active display change production pattern is 100%, and production patterns YAP1-2, YAP2-1, YAP2 -2 decision rate is 0%. Therefore, if the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", performance pattern YAP1-1 is determined as the active display change performance pattern, and performance patterns YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 are not determined. In this way, in the range where the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", which is the most disadvantageous variable display content for the player in the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, the active display change production is the first production. A limitation is set that although it can be executed in a pattern, it cannot be executed in the second performance pattern. Additionally, if the variable display content is "reach (lose)", production patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1 can be determined as active display change production patterns, and production pattern YAP2-2 cannot be determined. become. In this way, within the range where the variable display content is "reach (lose)", a limit is set in which the active display change performance is not executed in the third performance pattern. By restricting the active display change performance from being executed in the second performance pattern or the third performance pattern when the variable display content is disadvantageous to the player, the player's ability to improve the player's performance is improved by the active display change performance. It is possible to improve the game's interest by appropriately executing the active display change effect so that the expectation of the player is less likely to decrease.

In the decision example 002AKD52 of FIG. 10-28(B), for example, when the variable display content is "Probability (Jackpot)", the variable display content is "Non-Reach (Lose)", "Reach (Lose)", and "Non-Reach". Performance pattern YAP2-2 is determined as the pattern for active display change performance with a higher determination rate than when it is either ``Probability Variation (Jackpot)''. In addition, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)", the decision rate of production pattern YAP2-2 is higher than the decision rate of other production patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1. rate. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (jackpot)", the decision rate is lower than when the variable display content is "probability variation (jackpot)", and the same as production patterns YAP1-2 and YAP2-1. At a determination rate of 30%, the performance pattern YAP2-2 is determined. With such settings, when the active display change effect is executed in the effect pattern YAP2-2, the active display change effect is executed in any of the effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1. The degree of expectation of being controlled to a variable probability state, which is a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state, is higher than that in the case of the game. In addition, according to arbitrary settings, when the active display change effect is executed in the effect pattern YAP2-2, the active display change effect is executed in any of the effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, or YAP2-1. The degree of expectation of being controlled to a variable probability state, which is a special state advantageous to the player different from an advantageous state, may be higher than that in the case where the player is in an advantageous state.

FIG. 10-29(A) shows a determination example 002AKD61 of the after-reach effect. In the performance symbol variation start process, a post-reach performance can be determined in step AKS106. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine the post-reach performance at different rates in response to the variable display results. For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the decision rate for the background display effect is 50%, the decision rate for the step-up effect is 30%, and the decision rate for the story effect is 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision rate for background display effects is 20%, the decision rate for step-up effects is 30%, and the decision rate for story effects is 50%. . With such a setting, when a story effect is executed as a post-reach effect, it is controlled to a jackpot game state that is more advantageous for the player than when a background display effect or a step-up effect is executed. Expectations are high, and when a step-up performance is performed as a post-reach performance, the expectation is that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than when a background display performance is performed. degree becomes high. In addition, by setting arbitrary settings, when a story effect is executed as a post-reach effect, it is controlled to a jackpot game state that is more advantageous for the player than when a background display effect or a step-up effect is executed. In addition, when a step-up performance is performed as a post-reach performance, the player is controlled to a jackpot game state that is more advantageous than when a background display performance is performed. The level of expectation may be increased. In this way, by varying the level of jackpot expectation depending on the execution content of the post-reach performance, the post-reach performance is appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the post-reach performance is increased, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. be able to.

FIG. 10-29(B) shows a determination example 002AKD62 of the symbol transparent pattern. In this embodiment, three symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of transition patterns that can be displayed by transparently displaying production symbols serving as identification information. The number of transition patterns that can be displayed by transmitting the production design may be a plurality of patterns based on an arbitrary design. In the effect symbol variation start process, when the after-reach effect is determined in step AKS106, it is only necessary that the corresponding symbol transparent pattern can be determined. In the determination example 002AKD62, it is possible to determine different symbol transparency patterns in response to the after-reach performance. For example, when the after-reach effect is a background display effect, the symbol transparent pattern TSP1 is determined. When the after-reach performance is a step-up performance, a symbol transparent pattern TSP2 is determined. When the after-reach performance is a story performance, a symbol transparency pattern TSP3 is determined. The symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 have different transmittance settings when displaying the effect symbols transparently. The background display performance is controlled to a jackpot game state which is an advantageous state by displaying any of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 as a background image when the performance design is transparent according to the design transparency pattern TSP1. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation. The step-up performance controls the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state, by displaying the display images AKG1 to AKG4 in a changeable manner according to the number of stages when the performance symbols are transparent according to the symbol transparency pattern TSP2. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation. In the story production, when the production symbols are transparent according to the symbol transparency pattern TSP3, display images AKH11 to AKH44 are displayed in accordance with the progress of a series of stories, thereby creating an advantageous jackpot game state. It is possible to suggest controlled expectations.

FIG. 10-30 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the performance symbol variation start process, a performance control pattern can be determined in step AKS107. For example, the production control pattern that is the production control pattern when the special symbol changes is the execution of various productions from the start to the end of variable display of production symbols in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. It consists of control data used to control the The control data that constitutes the production control data includes multiple process data including production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. It can be set as divided into blocks. The performance control process timer determination value is a determination value that is compared with the performance control process timer value. The production control process timer value is a clock value of the production control process timer. In addition, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, for example, the reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main board 11, or the execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of production control, etc. may be set in response to predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the display mode of each performance symbol during variable display of the performance symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies display control of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects and the like linked to the variable display of the performance symbols. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies audio output control from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies control of the light emission mode of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an effective detection period for effectively detecting a player's operation, such as a tilting operation on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and a valid detection period for effectively detecting each operation. It includes data indicating the control of the performance mode in accordance with the detection of the player's motion, such as data specifying the content of control of the performance mode in the case of valid detection. The vibration control data includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor that vibrates the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. That is, the vibration control data is data that specifies vibration mode control of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data depending on the content of production operation by each production control pattern. There may be. Further, among the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may be different depending on the content of the production operation executed at each timing. In other words, some process data includes all of display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while others include only a portion of these data. It's fine. Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process during performance symbol fluctuation. The process during production symbol fluctuation is included in the process that can be called from the production control process process S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9(A), and when the production control process code loaded in step S153 is 02[H], It can be executed in step S155. When the performance control CPU 120 executes the process during performance symbol fluctuation, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, for example. is determined (step AKS121). At this time, the clock value of the production control process timer is updated by, for example, subtracting 1, and when an end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value, etc. Then, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

Corresponding to step AKS121, if the variable display period has not elapsed (step AKS121; No), it is determined whether it is the character movement performance period (step AKS122). The character movement performance period may be determined in advance, for example, in a performance control pattern for character movement performance. If it is the character movement effect period (step AKS122; Yes), character movement effect control is performed (step AKS123). Thereby, it is possible to execute the character movement effect, which is the specific effect, before the variable display that is the subject of the determination. Furthermore, after the variable display that is the target of the determination, the performance mode of the character movement performance that is the specific performance can be inherited and executed. At this time, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the character movement effect (step AKS124). The end timing of the character movement performance may be any timing at which a preset performance end condition is satisfied, for example, in the performance control pattern for the character movement performance. When it is the timing to end the character movement effect (step AKS124; Yes), character movement effect end control is performed (step AKS125). Thereby, when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, it is possible to end the effect after inheriting the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination. Furthermore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, it is possible to terminate the effect without inheriting the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination.

If it is not the character movement performance period corresponding to step ASK122 (step AKS122; No), or if it is not the character movement performance end timing corresponding to step AKS124 (step AKS124; No), or the control according to step ASK125 is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not it is the timer-related presentation period (step AKS126). The timer-related performance period may be predetermined as a period during which timer performance or timer standby performance can be executed, for example, in a performance control pattern for timer performance. If it is the timer-related performance period (step AKS126; Yes), timer-related performance control is performed (step AKS127). Thereby, a timer standby effect including a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be executed before the variable display that is the subject of determination. Further, in the variable display that is the subject of the determination, a timer effect including a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be executed. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the timer effect (step AKS128). The timer performance end timing may be any timing at which a preset performance end condition is satisfied, for example, in the performance control pattern for the timer performance. If it is the timer effect end timing (step AKS128; Yes), timer effect end control is performed (step AKS129). Thereby, in the variable display that is the target of the determination, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display for a short period or a long period, and then end the timer effect.

In response to step AKS126, if it is not the timer related effect period (step AKS126; No), if it is not the timer effect end timing in step AKS128 (step AKS128; No), or after the control in step AKS129, the active display It is determined whether or not it is a change performance period (step AKS130). The active display change effect period may be predetermined as a period in which the active display change effect can be executed, for example, in the effect control pattern for the active display change effect. If it is the active display change effect period (step AKS130; Yes), active display change effect control is performed (step AKS131). As a result, it is possible to perform a change performance in which the display mode of the active display, which is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display, is changed from the first mode to the second mode, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the first mode. Further, the control in step AKS131 includes control for making it possible to execute a history suggestion effect. For example, when changing the display mode of the active display by an active display change effect that is a change effect, after the active display change effect is started, it is possible to execute a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change. Bye.

If it is not the active display change production period in step AKS130 (step AKS130; No), or after the control in step AKS131, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win production period (step AKS132). The reach performance period is a period in which special reach performances such as normal reach, post-reach, reach development, super reach, and special reach performances can be executed, for example, in the special figure fluctuation performance control pattern. It is sufficient if it is determined in advance. When it is the ready-to-win presentation period (step AKS132; Yes), ready-to-win presentation control is performed (step AKS133).

The ready-to-reach production control in step AKS133 selects production symbols that serve as identification information that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, such as the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. , it may also include a symbol transparency control that allows the image to be displayed transparently. In this case, for example, during a specific period in which the post-reach performance is executed, the performance symbols serving as identification information are made transparent and displayable according to the symbol transparency pattern serving as a transition pattern. In addition, when the performance symbols are transparent, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state by displaying performance images that are special images in the post-reach performance, such as background display performance, step-up performance, and story performance. do.

When symbol transparency control is executed as the ready-to-reach effect control in step AKS133, a special effect may be executed in which the effect pattern serving as identification information is transparently displayed according to a pattern transparency pattern serving as a different transition pattern. . In this case, the special performance includes, for example, a first special performance that can display a performance pattern serving as identification information at a first transparency from the start to the end of the specific period during a specific period in which the post-reach performance is executed; Corresponding to the start of the specific period, it is possible to display a production pattern that serves as identification information at a second transmittance that is lower than the first transmittance, and corresponding to the end of the specific period, display a production pattern that serves as identification information as the first display. A second special effect that can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the transmittance may be included. Then, the determination rate of the special performance is set so that the degree of expectation of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state is higher when the second special performance is executed than when the first special performance is executed. All you have to do is stay there.

The ready-to-reach effect control in step AKS133 may include switching effect control when a ready-to-reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed. In this case, a first character display performance included in the first performance is used as a suggestive performance that suggests that the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a second character display performance included in a second performance that is switched after the first performance is executed. Directing and making it executable. Then, a first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance, such as a first character introduction performance, for example, and a second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance, such as a second character introduction performance, are made executable. As execution control of the corresponding effects including the first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect, the second corresponding effect can be executed while the first effect is being executed before switching from the first effect to the second effect. do.

If it is not the reach production period corresponding to step AKS132 (step AKS132; No), or after the control in step AKS133, based on the setting of control data in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, for example, Control is performed to execute any other performance during variable display, including variable display control of performance symbols (step AKS134), and the process during performance symbol variation is completed.

When the variable display time has elapsed corresponding to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS135). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step AKS135; No), the processing during production symbol variation ends and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, it is determined that the symbol confirmation command could not be received normally, and a predetermined error process is executed. You can. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step AKS135; Yes), the production symbol can be changed by, for example, supplying a drawing command corresponding to the symbol confirmation from the production control CPU 120 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to stop and display the final stop symbol that becomes the display result (step AKS136). As a result, the variable display result of the effect pattern that becomes the confirmed effect pattern is derived and displayed.

Following the control in step AKS136, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the winning start designation command (step AKS137). The winning start designation command reception waiting time is executed in step S155 when the production control process code loaded in step S153 of the production control process process S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9(A) is 03[H]. It is used as a standby time in the effect pattern fluctuation stop process. Further, the performance control process code is updated to 03[H], which is a value corresponding to the performance symbol fluctuation stop processing (step AKS138), and the performance symbol fluctuation processing is completed.

FIGS. 10-32 to 10-36 show examples of performance execution when a character movement performance is executed. Of these, FIG. 10-32 shows an example of performance execution in the case where the execution of the character movement performance is started based on the occurrence of a starting prize. The character movement effect becomes executable when a starting prize is generated based on the determination result in step AKS022 of the character movement effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13. In the production execution example 002AK101 shown in FIG. 10-32(A), the variable display of production symbols is executed, and the production symbols are displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. While all symbols are being changed, a pending display corresponding to the pending storage number "2" is being performed in the pending storage area AKB0. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), a starting prize is generated by the game ball passing through the first starting area in the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on the occurrence of such a starting prize, in step AKS022 of the character movement effect determination process, ``character movement effect available'' is determined to execute the character movement effect. In addition, in response to the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories is updated to "3", so the variable display being executed will be executed three times before the variable display that was the subject of judgment. . Therefore, the variable display in production execution example 002AK101 is the three-time previous variation.

Based on the determination result in step AKS022, the movement effect type is determined in step AKS024, and the effect pattern to be the character movement effect pattern is determined in step AKS025. Subsequently, execution of the character movement effect is started by character movement effect start setting in step AKS026. For example, among the plurality of performance patterns included in the moving performance type RSA shown in FIG. When the effect pattern for displaying CH01 is determined, execution of a character movement effect by displaying the character CH01, such as effect execution example 002AK102 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C1), is started. In addition, among the multiple performance patterns included in the moving performance type RSB shown in FIG. When a performance pattern for displaying the character CH11 in the variable display is determined, execution of a character movement performance by displaying the character CH11, such as the performance execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C2), is started. In the case of the moving effect type RSC, the character in the variable display that changes three times before, such as any of the effect patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-4-4 among the plurality of change patterns shown in FIG. A performance pattern for displaying CH11 can be determined. In the case of the moving performance type RSD, among the multiple performance patterns shown in FIG. 18, any of the performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-4-4-4 will be changed three times before. A performance pattern for displaying the character CH01 in variable display can be determined.

During execution of the character movement effect, based on the fact that the character movement effect flag is determined to be on in step AKS041 of the character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24, a switching suggestion is made in step AKS051. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform the performance. For example, in the case of the movement effect type RSA, in response to the execution of a variable display that fluctuates two times before, the determination rate corresponding to the currently displayed character such as the determination example 002AKD33 shown in FIG. 10-25(C) Then, whether or not to perform a switching suggestion effect may be determined. Furthermore, in the case of the movement effect type RSD, it may be determined to always execute the switching suggestion effect in response to the execution of the variable display that changes two times before.

FIG. 10-33 shows an example of performance execution when a character movement performance, etc. continued from the performance execution example 002AK102 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C1). Figures 10-33 (A) and 10-33 (B) show the case where the variable display that changes 2 times before is executed after the variable display that changes 3 times before in production execution example 002AK102 ends. Among them, an example of performance execution in the case where the switching suggestion performance and the character concealment performance are not executed is shown. The effect execution example 002AK111 shown in FIG. 10-33(A) is a character CH01 corresponding to the effect pattern that displays the same character CH01 as the third previous variation of the effect execution example 002AK102 in the variable display that changes two times ago. A moving performance is being performed. The effect execution example 002AK112 shown in FIG. 10-33(B) corresponds to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH02, which is different from the third previous variation of the effect execution example 002AK102, in the variable display with the two-time previous variation. A moving performance is being performed. In addition, it is only necessary that an effect image that recognizably indicates the reached display position is displayed. In the case of moving performance type RSA, if it is any of the performance patterns RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4 shown in Figure 10-15, three times in the two previous fluctuations such as performance execution example 002AK111. It is possible to execute a character movement effect that displays the character CH01 similar to the previous movement. In addition, in the case of the moving effect type RSA, if any of the effect patterns RPA1-2-2 to RPA1-2-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect that displays a character CH02 different from the character CH01 that changed three times ago.

Figure 10-33 (C) shows that following the end of the variable display that changes three times ago in the effect execution example 002AK102 shown in Figure 10-32 (C1), the variable display that changes two times ago is executed. Among the cases where the switching suggestion effect is executed, an effect execution example 002AK113 is shown. In this performance execution example 002AK113, a switching suggestion performance using a display image forming the effect display CJ01 is executed.

The switching suggestion performance may be executable in any of a plurality of types of performance modes. When it is determined to execute the switching suggestion effect in step AKS051 of the character movement effect execution processing shown in FIG. It may be possible to determine either one. In this case, a performance pattern that becomes a pattern for switching suggestion performance may be determined at a different determination rate in correspondence to a performance pattern that becomes a pattern for character movement performance. For example, when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD is a character movement performance pattern, the first suggestion performance pattern that can be determined as the switching suggestion performance pattern with a high determination rate is the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The determination rate may be set such that when is a pattern for character movement performance, it is possible to determine the pattern for switching suggestion performance with a low determination rate. In addition, when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD is a character movement performance pattern, the second suggestion performance pattern that can be determined as the switching suggestion performance pattern with a low determination rate is the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The determination rate may be set such that when is a pattern for character movement performance, it is possible to determine the pattern for switching suggestion performance with a high determination rate. With such a setting, when the switching suggestion effect is executed in the first suggestion effect pattern, it is more likely to be executed in the second pattern than when the switching suggestion effect is executed in the second suggestion effect pattern. The rate at which the character movement performance as the started specific performance is switched to the first pattern and executed becomes high. In this way, it may be possible to switch the character movement performance from the second pattern to the first pattern at different rates depending on which of the plurality of performance modes the switching suggestion performance is.

During the execution of the character movement effect, based on the fact that the character movement effect flag is determined to be on in step AKS041 of the character movement effect execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, the character is concealed in step AKS043. It is possible to decide whether or not to perform the performance. In this case, whether or not to perform the character concealment effect may be determined at a determination rate corresponding to the displayed character, such as the determination example 002AK31 shown in FIG. 10-25(A).

FIG. 10-33 (D) shows that following the end of the variable display that changes three times ago in the effect execution example 002AK102 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C1), the variable display that changes two times ago is executed. Among the cases where the character hiding effect is executed, an effect execution example 002AK114 is shown. In this performance execution example 002AK114, a character concealment performance is executed using a performance image forming the concealment display CK01.

The character concealment effect may be executable in any of a plurality of types of effect modes. When it is determined in step AKS043 of the character movement performance execution process shown in FIG. It may also be possible to determine the In this case, the performance pattern that becomes the concealment performance pattern may be determined at a different determination rate in correspondence with the performance pattern that becomes the character movement performance pattern. For example, when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB is a character movement performance pattern, the first concealment display pattern that can be determined as a concealment performance pattern with a high determination rate is the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The determination rate may be set so that a pattern for character movement effect can be determined as a pattern for concealment effect with a low determination rate. In addition, when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB is a character movement performance pattern, the second concealment display pattern that can be determined as a concealment performance pattern with a low determination rate is the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The determination rate may be set such that when the pattern is a pattern for character movement effect, it is possible to determine the pattern for concealment effect with a high determination rate.

The character concealment effect may be performed as long as it can be performed at any one of a plurality of timings, such as the start of variable display, the execution of variable display, and the end of variable display. When it is determined to execute a character concealment effect in step AKS043 of the character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24, the execution timing of the character concealment effect can be determined at one of a plurality of timings. There may be. The execution timing of the character concealment effect may be determined at one of a plurality of timings at different rates depending on whether or not the character displayed in the character movement effect changes. With such a setting, when the character concealment performance is executed at the first timing, it is possible to restart the character movement performance with a different performance mode at a higher rate than when the character concealment performance is executed at the second timing. It may be.

In step AKS046 of the character movement performance execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, as in the determination example 002AKD32 shown in FIG. 10-25(B), the hidden character is one of the characters CH01 to CH04. If the hidden character is one of the characters CH11 to CH14, it is determined to "restart display" at a high rate. With such settings, if after starting execution of a character movement effect as a specific effect in the first pattern, a character concealment effect is executed as a special effect in the first concealment display pattern and the character becomes invisible. At a high rate, it is possible to restart the character movement effect in the first pattern, and after starting the execution of the character movement effect as a specific effect in the second pattern, the character concealment effect as a special effect is started in the second concealment display pattern. When the character movement performance is executed and becomes invisible, it is possible to restart the character movement performance at a low rate, and it is possible to end the character movement performance without restarting at a high rate. In this way, it may be possible to restart the character movement performance at different rates depending on which of a plurality of performance modes the character concealment performance is.

Figures 10-33 (E) and 10-33 (F) show effects when a character movement effect in a variable display that changes two times before is executed following the execution of the switching suggestion effect in effect execution example 002AK113. An example of execution is shown. In the performance execution example 002AK115 shown in FIG. 10-33(E), a character movement performance is executed in accordance with a performance pattern in which the same character CH01 as before the switching suggestion performance is displayed without switching. In the performance execution example 002AK116 shown in FIG. 10-33(F), a character movement performance is executed in accordance with a performance pattern in which the character CH11 is switched and displayed, which is different from that before the switching suggestion performance was executed. In the case of movement effect type RSA, if it is any of RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4 shown in Figure 10-15, even if a switching suggestion effect like the effect execution example 002AK113 is executed, the effect will not be executed. It is possible to perform character movement effects without switching the display of character CH01 as in execution example 002AK115. On the other hand, in the case of the moving performance type RSD, if any of the performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-4-4 shown in FIG. 10-18, the performance execution example 002AK113 By executing the switching suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a character movement effect that switches the display from the character CH01 to the display of the character CH11 as in the effect execution example 002AK116. Therefore, when a switching suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK113 is executed and the display of the character is not switched, the character movement effect which becomes the specific effect is performed using the second effect pattern such as the effect execution example 002AK115. Can be executed continuously. On the other hand, when a switching suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK113 is executed and the character display is switched, a character movement effect that becomes a specific effect in the first effect pattern such as the effect execution example 002AK116. is possible.

FIG. 10-34 shows an example of performance execution when a character movement performance, etc. following from the performance execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C2) is executed. Figures 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B) show the case where the variable display that changes 2 times ago is executed after the variable display that changes 3 times ago in production execution example 002AK103 ends. Among them, an example of performance execution in the case where the switching suggestion performance and the character concealment performance are not executed is shown. The effect execution example 002AK121 shown in FIG. 10-34(A) corresponds to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH11, which is the same as the third previous variation of the effect execution example 002AK103, in the variable display with the two previous variations. A moving performance is being performed. The effect execution example 002AK122 shown in FIG. 10-34(B) corresponds to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH12, which is different from the third previous variation of the effect execution example 002AK103, in the variable display with the two-time previous variation. A moving performance is being performed. In addition, it is only necessary that an effect image that recognizably indicates the reached display position is displayed. In the case of moving performance type RSB, if it is any of the performance patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-4-4 shown in Figure 10-16, the performance execution example 002AK121 two times before In the variation, it is possible to execute a character movement effect that displays the same character CH11 as in the three previous variations. In addition, in the case of the moving performance type RSB, if any of the performance patterns RPB1-2-2-2 to RPB1-2-4-4 shown in FIG. In the previous variation, it is possible to perform a character movement effect that displays a character CH12 different from the character CH11 of the third previous variation.

FIG. 10-34 (C) shows that following the end of the variable display that changes three times ago in the effect execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C2), the variable display that changes two times ago is executed. Among the cases where the switching suggestion effect is executed, an effect execution example 002AK123 is shown. In this performance execution example 002AK123, a switching suggestion performance using a display image forming the effect display CJ01 is executed.

The switching suggestion performance may be executable in any of a plurality of types of performance modes. As in the case of the effect execution example 002AK113 shown in FIG. 10-33(C), it is decided to execute the switching suggestion effect in step AKS051 of the character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24. In this case, it may be possible to determine the effect pattern to be the switching suggestion effect pattern to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In this case, a performance pattern that becomes a pattern for switching suggestion performance may be determined at a different determination rate in correspondence to a performance pattern that becomes a pattern for character movement performance. For example, when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSC is a character movement performance pattern, the third suggestion performance pattern that can be determined as the switching suggestion performance pattern with a high determination rate is the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB. The determination rate may be set such that when is a pattern for character movement performance, it is possible to determine the pattern for switching suggestion performance with a low determination rate. In addition, when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSC is a character movement performance pattern, the fourth suggestion performance pattern that can be determined as the switching suggestion performance pattern with a low determination rate is the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB. The determination rate may be set such that when is a pattern for character movement performance, it is possible to determine the pattern for switching suggestion performance with a high determination rate. With such a setting, when the switching suggestion performance is executed in the fourth suggestion performance pattern, it is more likely to be executed in the first pattern than when the switching suggestion performance is executed in the third suggestion performance pattern. The rate at which the character movement performance as a started specific performance is executed while maintaining the second pattern without switching to the second pattern increases. In this way, depending on which of the plurality of presentation modes the switching suggestion presentation is, it may be possible to perform character movement presentation at different rates without switching from the first pattern to the second pattern.

FIG. 10-34 (D) shows that, following the end of the variable display that changes three times in the previous example in effect execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C2), the variable display that changes two times ago is executed. Among the cases where the character concealment effect is executed, an effect execution example 002AK124 is shown. In this effect execution example 002AK124, a character concealment display is executed using the effect image forming the concealment display CK01.

The character concealment display may be executable in any one of a plurality of types of presentation modes. As in the case of the effect execution example 002AK114 shown in FIG. 10-33(D), it is decided to execute the character concealment effect in step AKS043 of the character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24. In this case, it may be possible to determine the performance pattern to be the concealment performance pattern to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In this case, the performance pattern that becomes the concealment performance pattern may be determined at a different determination rate in correspondence with the performance pattern that becomes the character movement performance pattern.

Figures 10-34 (E) and 10-34 (F) show effects when, following the execution of the switching suggestion effect in effect execution example 002AK123, a character movement effect in a variable display that changes two times before is executed. An example of execution is shown. In the performance execution example 002AK125 shown in FIG. 10-34(E), a character movement performance is executed in accordance with a performance pattern in which the same character CH11 as before the switching suggestion performance is displayed without switching. In the performance execution example 002AK126 shown in FIG. 10-34(F), a character movement performance is executed in accordance with a performance pattern in which the character CH01 is switched and displayed, which is different from that before the switching suggestion performance was executed. In the case of the movement effect type RSB, if it is any of RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-4-4 shown in Figure 10-16, a switching suggestion effect like the effect execution example 002AK123 is executed. Even if the character is moved, the character movement effect can be executed without changing the display of the character CH11 as in the effect execution example 002AK125. On the other hand, in the case of the moving performance type RSC, if any of the performance patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4 shown in FIG. By executing the performance, it is possible to perform a character movement performance that switches the display from the character CH11 to the display of the character CH01 as in the performance execution example 002AK126. Therefore, when a switching suggestion effect such as effect execution example 002AK123 is executed and the display of the character is not switched, a character movement effect which becomes a specific effect is performed using the first effect pattern such as effect execution example 002AK125. Can be executed continuously. On the other hand, when a switching suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK123 is executed and the character display is switched, a character movement effect that becomes a specific effect in the second effect pattern such as the effect execution example 002AK126. is possible.

FIGS. 10-35 and 10-36 show an example of performance execution using a character movement performance that corresponds to a variable display that is a previous change or a target change. FIG. 10-35 (A1) shows a performance execution example 002AK131 in which a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which the character CH01 is displayed in a variable display that changes one time before. In the case of movement effect type RSA, if the effect pattern RPA1-1-1 shown in FIG. 10-15 is used, it is possible to execute a character movement effect that displays character CH01 in the previous variation as in effect execution example 002AK131. It is. In addition, in the case of the movement effect type RSC, if the effect pattern RPC1-1-1 shown in FIG. It is doable. When a character movement effect is executed in a variable display that changes from the previous time, an inheritance determination effect may be executed. In the production execution example 002AK131, it is sufficient to make it possible to recognize that the execution of the inheritance determination production has started by displaying the character CH101.

FIG. 10-35 (B1) and FIG. 10-35 (C1) show an example of performance execution in the case where, following the display of character CH101, etc. in performance execution example 002AK131, inheritance determination performance progresses in character movement performance. . In the performance execution example 002AK132 shown in FIG. 10-35 (B1), a battle performance is being executed between the character CH01, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance, and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination performance. In the performance execution example 002AK133 shown in FIG. 10-35 (C1), a defeat performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that the character CH01 has lost the battle as a performance result in the battle performance of the performance execution example 002AK132. In this case, the character movement performance that has been executed up to the variable display that is the previous variation is completed, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited in the variable display that is the target variation that is the subject of determination. In performance execution example 002AK133, when the defeat performance is executed, the variable display of the performance symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the performance result in the battle performance can be shown in a way that is easy for the player to recognize. It is only necessary that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. In accordance with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance, a performance pattern set in advance as a look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed so as to overlap with the display in the character movement performance. , it is only necessary to increase the player's attention to the character movement effect and improve the interest in the game. Figure 10-35 (D1) shows a case where a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of a variable display that is a previous variation in which character movement effects such as production execution examples 002AK131 to 002AK133 were executed. An example of performance execution 002AK134 is shown. When a character movement effect is executed corresponding to any of the effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA or RSC, the target The character movement performance is executed in a second pattern in which the performance mode is not inherited after the variable display that changes. In the case of movement performance type RSA, character movement performance can be executed in different performance modes corresponding to a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement performance. The effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA displays any of the characters CH01 to CH04 as being changeable for each variable display. The determination rate of the effect pattern may be set so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on which of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed. For example, when character CH04 is displayed, the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state may be higher than when any of characters CH01 to CH03 is displayed. In this way, when the character movement performance is executed in the second pattern in which the performance mode is not inherited, the degree of expectation to be controlled into the jackpot game state may be different depending on the plurality of performance modes.

Furthermore, in the character movement effect, after the character CH01 is displayed, it can be displayed as any of the characters CH02 to CH04. On the other hand, in the character movement effect, after the character CH02 is displayed, it can change to either character CH03 or CH04, but the effect pattern is set so that the display does not change to the character CH01. is configured. In the character movement effect, after the character CH03 is displayed, the effect pattern is configured so that it can change to the character CH04, but not change to the display of either the character CH01 or CH02. There is. In the character movement effect, the effect pattern is configured such that after the character CH04 is displayed, the display does not change to any of the characters CH01 to CH03. In the character movement performance, when character CH04 is displayed, the expectation level to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is highest, and when character CH03 is displayed, the expectation level to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the next highest, and character CH02 The determination rate of the performance pattern is set so that when the character CH01 is displayed, the expectation level to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the next highest, and when the character CH01 is displayed, the expectation level to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is the lowest. It is sufficient if it is set. In this case, after one of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed and the player becomes able to recognize the jackpot expectation level corresponding to that display, if the display changes to a character with a lower jackpot expectation level, once There is a risk that the player's heightened expectations may be diminished and interest in the game may be diminished. Therefore, if the character movement performance can be performed in multiple types of performance modes, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is different depending on the multiple types of performance modes, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is After the character movement performance is executed in the first performance mode where the performance is high, a restriction may be set so as not to change to the second mode in which the expectation level is lower than that of the first performance mode, which is controlled to be a jackpot game state. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in the player's sense of expectation.

FIG. 10-35 (A2) shows a performance execution example 002AK135 in which a character movement performance is executed in accordance with a performance pattern in which the character CH11 is displayed in a variable display that changes one time before. In the case of moving performance type RSB, if it is any of the performance patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-1-4 shown in Figure 10-16, the previous performance execution example 002AK135 It is possible to perform a character movement effect that displays the character CH11 in the variation. In addition, in the case of the moving performance type RSD, if it is any of the performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to perform a character movement effect that displays the character CH11 in the previous variation. In the performance execution example 002AK135 as well, as in the performance execution example 002AK131, it may be possible to recognize that the execution of the inheritance determination performance has started by displaying the character CH101.

FIG. 10-35 (B2) and FIG. 10-35 (C2) show an example of performance execution in the case where, following the display of character CH101, etc. in performance execution example 002AK135, inheritance determination performance progresses in character movement performance. . In the performance execution example 002AK136 shown in FIG. 10-35 (B2), a battle performance is being executed between the character CH11 that has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination performance. In the performance execution example 002AK137 shown in FIG. 10-35 (C2), a victory performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that the character CH11 has won the battle as a performance result in the battle performance of the performance execution example 002AK136. In this case, the character movement performance that has been executed up to the variable display that is the previous variation continues, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited in the variable display that is the target variation that is the subject of determination. In performance execution example 002AK137, when the victory performance is executed, the variable display of the performance symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the performance result in the battle performance can be shown in a way that is easy for the player to recognize. It is only necessary that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. In accordance with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance, a performance pattern set in advance as a look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed so as to overlap with the display in the character movement performance. , it is only necessary to increase the player's attention to the character movement effect and improve the interest in the game. Figure 10-35 (D2) shows a case where a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of a variable display that is a previous variation in which character movement effects such as production execution examples 002AK135 to 002AK137 were executed. An example of performance execution 002AK138 is shown. In production execution example 002 AK138, the display of character CH11 in the character movement production reaches the arrival display position, and a production is executed by displaying a display image including a character image notifying a message. When a character movement effect is executed corresponding to any of the effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB or RSD, the execution of the character movement effect does not end in the variable display that changes from the previous time, so that the target Character movement performance is executed in a first pattern that inherits the performance mode after the variable display that changes.

FIG. 10-36 (A1) shows a performance execution example 002AK141 in which a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which the character CH02 is displayed in a variable display that changes one time before. In the case of the movement effect type RSA, if the effect pattern is such as the effect pattern RPA1-1-2 shown in FIG. 10-15 in which the character CH02 is set corresponding to the previous change, the effect execution example 002AK141 It is possible to execute a character movement effect that displays the character CH02 in the previous change like this. In addition, in the case of the moving performance type RSC, if the performance pattern is such as the performance pattern RPC1-1-2 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect that displays the character CH02 in the previous change such as example 002AK141. In the performance execution example 002AK141, as in the performance execution example 002AK121, it may be possible to recognize that the execution of the inheritance determination performance has started by displaying the character CH101.

FIG. 10-36 (B1) and FIG. 10-36 (C1) show an example of performance execution in the case where, following the display of character CH101, etc. in performance execution example 002AK141, inheritance determination performance progresses in character movement performance. . In the performance execution example 002AK142 shown in FIG. 10-36 (B1), a battle performance is being executed between the character CH02, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance, and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination performance. In the performance execution example 002AK143 shown in FIG. 10-36 (C1), a defeat performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that the character CH02 has lost the battle as a performance result in the battle performance of the performance execution example 002AK142. In this case, the character movement performance that has been executed up to the variable display that is the previous variation is completed, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited in the variable display that is the target variation that is the subject of determination. In performance execution example 002AK143, when the defeat performance is executed, the variable display of performance symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the performance result in the battle performance can be shown in a way that is easy for the player to recognize. It is only necessary that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. In accordance with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance, a performance pattern set in advance as a look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed so as to overlap with the display in the character movement performance. , it is only necessary to increase the player's attention to the character movement effect and improve the interest in the game. Figure 10-36 (D1) shows a case where a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of a variable display that is a previous variation in which character movement effects such as production execution examples 002AK141 to 002AK143 were executed. Shows an example of performance execution 002AK144. When a character movement effect is executed corresponding to any of the effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA or RSC, the target The character movement performance is executed in a second pattern in which the performance mode is not inherited after the variable display that changes.

FIG. 10-36 (A2) shows a performance execution example 002AK145 in which a character movement performance is executed in accordance with a performance pattern in which the character CH12 is displayed in a variable display that changes one time before. In the case of the movement performance type RSB, if the performance pattern is such as the performance pattern RPB1-1-2-2 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect that displays the character CH12 in the previous change such as example 002AK145. In addition, in the case of the moving performance type RSD, if the performance pattern is such that the character CH12 is set corresponding to the previous fluctuation, such as the performance pattern RPD1-1-2-2 shown in FIG. 10-18, It is possible to execute a character movement performance that displays the character CH12 in the previous variation such as performance execution example 002AK145. In production execution example 002AK145 as well, similarly to production execution example 002AK141, it may be possible to recognize that the execution of the inheritance determination production has started by displaying the character CH101.

FIG. 10-36 (B2) and FIG. 10-36 (C2) show an example of performance execution in the case where inheritance determination performance progresses in character movement performance following the display of character CH101, etc. in performance execution example 002AK145. . In the performance execution example 002AK146 shown in FIG. 10-36 (B2), a battle performance is being executed between the character CH12, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance, and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination performance. In the performance execution example 002AK147 shown in FIG. 10-36 (C2), a victory performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that the character CH12 has won the battle as a performance result in the battle performance of the performance execution example 002AK146. In this case, the character movement performance that has been executed up to the variable display that is the previous variation continues, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited in the variable display that is the target variation that is the subject of determination. In performance execution example 002AK137, when the victory performance is executed, the variable display of the performance symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the performance result in the battle performance can be shown in a way that is easy for the player to recognize. It is only necessary that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. In accordance with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance, a performance pattern set in advance as a look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed so as to overlap with the display in the character movement performance. , it is only necessary to increase the player's attention to the character movement effect and improve the interest in the game. Figure 10-36 (D2) shows a case where a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of a variable display that is a previous variation in which character movement effects such as production execution examples 002AK145 to 002AK147 were executed. Shows an example of performance execution 002AK148. In production execution example 002AK148, the display of the character CH12 reaches the arrival display position in the character movement production, and a production is executed by displaying a display image including a character image notifying a message. The message that is announced when the display of character CH12 reaches the arrival display position in the character movement performance is different from the message that is announced when the display of character CH11 reaches the arrival display position in the character movement performance. Good to have. In this way, a message may be notified in a different notification mode depending on the presentation mode when the character movement presentation is inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination. When a character movement effect is executed corresponding to any of the effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB or RSD, the execution of the character movement effect does not end in the variable display that changes from the previous time, so that the target Character movement performance is executed in a first pattern that inherits the performance mode after the variable display that changes.

FIG. 10-37(A) shows a character display rate setting example 002AKE01 corresponding to the movement effect types RSA and RSD. In this setting example 002AKE01, when a character movement effect is executed in a variable display that changes three times before, the display rate of each character set in the second pattern that does not inherit the effect mode is the movement effect type RSA, The display rates differ depending on the RSD. The three-time previous variable display character indicates a character that is displayed when a character movement effect is executed in the variable display that is the third-time previous change.

In the case of the moving performance type RSA, the performance pattern is determined at a determination rate such as determination example 002AKD13 shown in FIG. 10-19(A). In the case of the moving performance type RSD, the performance pattern is determined at a determination rate such as determination example 002AKD16 shown in FIG. 10-20(B). With such a setting, in the case of the moving performance type RSA, the display rate of the character CH01 corresponding to the three-time previous fluctuation is higher than that in the case of the moving performance type RSD, both in the case of a loss and in the case of a jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of the moving performance type RSA, the display rates of characters CH02 to CH04 corresponding to the three previous fluctuations are lower than those in the case of the moving performance type RSD, both at the time of loss and at the time of jackpot. Therefore, when a character movement effect is executed in a variable display that changes three times before, when character CH01 is displayed, the type of movement effect is higher than when any of characters CH02 to CH04 is displayed. The percentage of RSA becomes high, and the percentage of movement effect type RSD becomes low. When a character movement effect is executed with the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD, a victory effect is executed after the inheritance judgment effect in the variable display that is the previous change, and the effect is performed after the variable display that becomes the target change. This is the first pattern in which the aspect is inherited. Then, when character CH01 is displayed in the variable display that changes three times before, the proportion of movement effect type RSA increases, and the execution of the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, is started in the second pattern. After that, the rate of switching the character movement effect to the first pattern and executing it is low. On the other hand, if any of the characters CH02 to CH04 is displayed in the variable display that fluctuates 3 times before, the proportion of the movement effect type RSD increases, and the second pattern becomes a specific effect. After starting the execution of the character movement effect, there is a high rate of switching the character movement effect to the first pattern and executing it. In this way, in response to a plurality of second patterns with different presentation modes, such as characters displayed in a variable display that fluctuates three times before, the rate at which character movement effects, which are specific effects, are switched to the first pattern and executed. can be made into different things. Not limited to the characters displayed in the variable display that fluctuates three times before, the character movement performance that is the specific performance can be performed in response to a plurality of second patterns in which arbitrary performance modes are different in the character movement performance that is the specific performance. It is sufficient if the rate at which the first pattern is switched to and executed is different.

FIG. 10-37(B) shows a character display rate setting example 002AKE02 corresponding to the movement effect types RSB and RSD. In this setting example 002AKE02, when a character movement effect is executed in a variable display that is subject to change, the display rate of each character set in the first pattern that inherits the effect mode is set for each movement effect type RSB and RSD. The display rate differs depending on the three previous variable display characters that can be displayed. The 3rd previous fluctuation display character is a character that is displayed when a character movement effect is executed in the variable display that is the 3rd time previous change, and in the case of movement effect type RSB, any of the characters CH11 to CH14 can be displayed. In the case of the movement effect type RSD, any one of the characters CH01 to CH04 can be displayed.

In the case of the moving performance type RSB, the performance pattern is determined at a determination rate such as determination example 002AKD14 shown in FIG. 10-19(B). In the case of the moving performance type RSD, the performance pattern is determined at a determination rate such as determination example 002AKD16 shown in FIG. 10-20(B). With such a setting, in the case of the movement effect type RSB, if the character CH11 corresponds to the change three times before, the display rate of the character CH11 corresponding to the target change at the time of loss becomes the highest. On the other hand, in the case of the movement effect type RSD, when the character CH01 corresponds to the change three times before, the display rate of the character CH14 corresponding to the target change at the time of loss is the highest. In addition, the display rate of characters CH11 to CH14, which are the target variable display characters, is the case when the 3rd previous variable display character is any of the characters CH11 to CH14 corresponding to the movement effect type RSB, and the case where the 3rd previous variable display character is The display rate is different depending on whether the character is one of the characters CH01 to CH04 corresponding to the movement effect type RSD. Therefore, among the cases in which a character movement effect is executed in a variable display that fluctuates three times, there are two cases in which one of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSB, and a case in which the movement effect type RSD The ratio of which of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in the variable display that is subject to change differs depending on the case where the characters CH01 to CH04 are displayed using the production pattern included in the above. In this way, there is a case where execution of a character movement effect that is a specific effect is started in the first pattern in which any of characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in a variable display that is a three-time previous change, and a case where a three-time previous change is made. When switching to the first pattern after starting execution of a character movement effect that is a specific effect in the second pattern in which any of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed in the variable display, the display in the variable display that becomes the target change The proportion of the character movement performance that is the specific performance can be made different in which of a plurality of first patterns having different performance modes, such as a character being moved. Not limited to the characters displayed in the variable display that is the 3rd previous change or the target change, but when the first pattern starts execution of a character movement effect that becomes a specific effect, and the second pattern becomes a specific effect. It is only necessary to make the ratio in which of a plurality of first patterns the character movement performance is executed as a specific performance different depending on the case where the character movement performance is switched to the first pattern after starting the execution of the character movement performance.

Character movement performance is different from when the performance execution is started with the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB and when the performance execution is started with the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD. Control data and the like in the performance control pattern may be set so that the performance modes are different. For example, when any of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed using the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB, the speaker 8L is , 8R may increase the volume of the audio output, the control data in the production control pattern may be set. In addition, the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the operation of the movable members including the movable body 32, or all of these. Alternatively, the presentation mode may be made different by using an arbitrary presentation device such as a partial combination.

FIG. 10-38 shows an example of performance execution when active display change performance is executed. When the display result in the variable display of the production execution example 002AK201 shown in FIG. 10-38(A) is stopped and displayed and the variable display ends, the pending display corresponding to the pending number "1" is displayed in the pending storage display area AKB0. is displayed in green using display image AKE2. In step AKS006 of the look-ahead effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, the effect image to be the pending display image is determined, and in response to this determination result, in step AKS007, the pending display update setting at the time of starting winning is performed. , it is possible to start a hold display using the display image AKE2 in response to the occurrence of a starting prize. In the effect execution example 002AK202 shown in FIG. 10-38(B), following the effect execution example 002AK201, when a new variable display is started, the pending display is shifted and the active display is updated. At this time, in step AKS102 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27, it is determined that the active display change effect is executed.

Based on the determination result in step AKS102, a production pattern to be an active display change production pattern is determined in step AKS104. Thereafter, in step AKS107, a production control pattern corresponding to the active display change production pattern is determined. Using the performance control pattern thus determined, performance control for executing the active display change performance becomes possible through step AKS131 of the process during performance symbol variation shown in FIG. 10-31. For example, when the effect pattern YAP2-2 shown in FIG. 10-28(C) is determined as the active display change effect pattern, an effect effect such as effect execution example 002AK203 shown in FIG. 10-38(C) Execution of active display change effects including . The action effect may be any display effect as long as the display of an effect image different from the active display acts on the active display. When the active display change effect is executed in the effect pattern YAP2-2, the display mode of the active display can be changed twice, and the second change is performed after the first change. Figure 10-38 (D) shows the effect when the display mode of the active display changes to the display mode that notifies the message of "opportunity" using the display image AKE12 for the first time, following the effect execution example 002AK203. Execution example 002AK204 is shown.

In production execution example 002AK204, the display mode of the active display was changed from the first mode based on display image AKE2 to the second mode based on display image AKE12, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state than the first mode. Thereafter, the display color of the active display becomes green as a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change. Such performance control may be performed as long as it can be executed using a performance control pattern determined in correspondence with the active display change performance pattern. A predetermined suggestion presentation period may be set in advance as the execution period of the history suggestion presentation. A restriction may be set so that an action presentation that changes the display mode of the active display next time is not performed until this suggestion presentation period ends. The suggested performance period may be a period of a certain period of time, or may be a period from when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach state to the timing at which a ready-to-reach performance that becomes a normal reach is executed. In addition, the suggested performance period may be any period that is set in advance in accordance with the progress of the performance. FIG. 10-38(E) shows a performance execution example 002AK205 when the suggested performance period ends after the performance execution example 002AK204. In this case, the green display of the active display in the history suggestion performance is terminated, and the display is controlled to a normal white display or the like. The history suggestion effect is not limited to one that corresponds to the first mode before the change depending on the display color of the effect image. For example, by displaying the display image before the change in a small size separately from the display image after the change, The first aspect may be displayed in a recognizable manner.

FIG. 10-38(F) shows a performance execution example 002AK206 in which an action performance in the active display change performance is executed after the performance execution example 002AK205. Figure 10-38 (G) shows the case where the display mode of the active display changes to the display mode that notifies the message of "extreme heat" using display image AKE13, following the production execution example 002AK206, for the second time. A performance execution example 002AK207 is shown.

A change performance that changes the display mode of an active display that is a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display, such as an active display change production, can be performed by performing an effect production in one of multiple types of display modes, for example, to create a different display. It may be possible to implement it in various ways. In this case, even if the same history suggestion effect can be executed when the active display change effect is executed in the first effect mode and in the second effect mode among multiple types of effect modes, good. In this way, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display, the execution of the change effect will start even if the change effect is executed in any of the multiple types of display modes. It is only necessary that the history suggestion performance corresponding to the first mode before the change can be executed after the change is made.

FIG. 10-39 shows an example of execution control of the active display change effect shown in FIG. 10-38. In this execution control example, before the timing T01 of the start of variation in the variable display at which the active display change effect is executed, the previous variable display like the effect execution example 002AK201 shown in FIG. 10-38(A) is It is in a finished state. Then, in response to the start of the variation at timing T01, the active display in the active display area AKA0 is updated as shown in the effect execution example 002AK202 shown in FIG. 10-38(B), and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is updated. As a display, a green display is performed using the display image AKE2. Thereafter, execution of the active display change effect is started at timing T02, and during the period up to timing T03, the effect execution example 002AK203 shown in FIG. 10-38(C) is executed as an effect effect corresponding to the first change. A presentation image is displayed. When the action presentation corresponding to the first change ends at timing T03, the display mode of the active display changes and execution of the history suggestion presentation is started. As a result, in the period up to timing T04, a history suggestion effect like the effect execution example 002AK204 shown in FIG. 10-38(D) is executed.

When the history suggestion effect ends at timing T04, the display color is set to the normal display color, such as white, as the display mode of the active display, so that the effect execution example 002AK205 shown in FIG. 10-38(E) An active display like this will be displayed. Further, at timing T05, an action production corresponding to the second change in the active display change production is started, and in the period up to timing T06, a production image like production execution example 002AK206 shown in FIG. 10-38(F) is started. is displayed. When the action presentation corresponding to the second change ends at timing T06, the display mode of the active display changes. As a result, after timing T06, active display like the effect execution example 002AK207 shown in FIG. 10-38(G) becomes possible.

In this way, when the active display change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display, is changed from the first mode to the second mode, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the first mode. It is possible to perform a change effect that changes the image. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display by the active display change effect, after the active display change effect is started, it is possible to execute the history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change. As a result, when the display mode of the corresponding active display changes, it becomes possible to recognize the display mode before the change, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Note that the performance execution is not limited to the display mode of the active display, but when the production mode changes from the first mode in any performance and becomes a second mode with higher jackpot expectation than the first mode, the performance execution is started. Any device that can execute the history suggestion performance corresponding to the first mode before the change after the change is acceptable. In this way, it is only necessary to improve the interest in the game by making it possible to recognize the performance mode before the change. When a specific effect including a character movement effect is executed, after starting the execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the history suggestion effect is executed in response to switching to the first pattern and executing the specific effect. By executing the above, after the specific performance switched to the first pattern is started, the performance mode corresponding to the second pattern before switching may be recognized. All or part of the change performance or history suggestion performance includes displaying a performance image on the image display device 5, outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and turning on the movable body 32. It is sufficient if it can be performed using any effect device, such as the movement of movable members included in the movement, or a combination of all or part of these.

FIG. 10-40 shows an example of performance execution when a super reach performance is executed. In step AKS107 of the performance symbol fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 10-27, a performance control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined. Using the performance control pattern determined in step AKS107, performance control for executing a reach performance that becomes a super reach becomes possible through step AKS133 of the process during performance symbol variation shown in FIG. 10-31. FIG. 10-40(A) shows a performance execution example 002AK301 corresponding to the start of a reach performance that becomes a super reach. In this case, a character CH201 serving as an ally character and a character CH202 serving as an enemy character are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a blue background is displayed as the corresponding display color of the character CH201 in the display area around the character CH201, and a red background is displayed as the corresponding display color of the character CH202 in the display area around the character CH202. In addition, an effect image or the like is displayed that informs that it is a battle chance for a character CH201 who will be an ally character and a character CH202 who will be an enemy character to compete against each other. In this battle chance, when the character CH201, which is an ally character, wins the battle against the character CH202, which is an enemy character, it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Such a reach effect including the display of the character CH201 as an ally character and the display of the character CH202 as an enemy character is included in the suggestive effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

FIG. 10-40(B) shows a production execution example 002AK302 in which a character CH201 to be an ally character is introduced following the production execution example 002AK301. At this time, as a first character display effect included in the first effect, an effect by displaying the character CH201 is executed. Further, as a first character introduction performance included in a first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance, a performance is performed by displaying a message introducing the character CH201 in the display area displayed in blue. This makes it possible to execute the first performance and the first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance.

FIG. 10-40(C) shows a performance execution example 002AK303 in which a character CH201 serving as an ally character is being displayed after the performance execution example 002AK302. In this case, the performance by displaying the character CH201 continues as the first character display performance included in the first performance. On the other hand, the first character introduction performance included in the first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance has ended, and the second character introduction performance included in the second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance is displayed in red. An effect is performed by displaying a message to introduce the character CH202 in the display area. Thereby, before switching from the first performance to the second performance, execution of the second corresponding performance can be started while the first performance is being executed.

FIG. 10-40(D) shows a performance execution example 002AK304 in which a character CH202 serving as an enemy character is displayed next to the performance execution example 002AK303. At this time, a performance by displaying the character CH202 is executed as a second character display performance included in the second performance. Further, as a second character introduction performance included in a second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance, a performance is performed by displaying a message introducing the character CH202 in the display area displayed in red. This makes it possible to perform a second performance obtained by switching the first performance and a second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance. In addition, there are cases where execution of the second corresponding effect is started during the execution of the first effect as in effect execution example 002AK303, and cases where the second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect is executed as in effect execution example 002AK304. In this case, a part of the production mode in the second corresponding production may be different. For example, in production execution example 002AK303 and production execution example 002AK304, the display area in which the production is executed by displaying a message is displayed in red is common, but the size, shape, pattern of the display area, and addition to the display area are the same. The effect display, size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of arbitrary effect images may be different display modes. Also, when a message is displayed by the character CH202 uttering a line, in the production execution example 002AK303, the character CH202's line cannot be announced, but in the production execution example 002AK304, the character CH202's line can be announced. good.

In this way, when a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed, the first character display effect, which is the first effect, and the first effect are used as suggestion effects in the reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. It is possible to execute a second character display effect, which is a second effect that is switched after the execution of the second character display effect. Further, it is possible to execute a first character introduction performance that is a first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance, and a second character introduction performance that is a second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance. Then, before the first character display performance is switched to the second character display performance, execution of the second character introduction performance can be started while the first character display performance is being executed. This makes it possible to easily recognize the changes and relationships between effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

After displaying the character CH202, which is an enemy character, such as in production execution example 002AK304, a third production in which neither the character CH201 nor the character CH202 is displayed may be executed. When such a third effect is executed, the third corresponding effect may be executed in a different effect from the first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect, or the third corresponding effect may be performed in a different effect from the first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect. The effect may not be executed and only the third effect may be executed. The third effect may be, for example, a flash display effect that displays a flash on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a rainbow lighting effect that causes light emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs to light up in rainbow colors. You can. In addition, all or part of the third performance includes displaying a performance image on the image display device 5, outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Any performance device may be used as long as it can be performed using any performance device, such as the movement of a movable member or a combination of all or part of these.

After displaying the character CH202, which is the enemy character, as in the example 002 of performance execution AK304, a post-introduction performance may be executed in which both the character CH201 and the character CH202 are displayed. When such a post-introduction performance is executed, the corresponding performance may be executed in a performance mode that is common to either the performance mode of the first corresponding performance or the performance mode of the second corresponding performance. Which presentation mode to perform the corresponding presentation may be determined to be a different presentation mode depending on the progress control of the presentation, such as the presentation content in the next reach presentation that becomes super reach. For example, when the character CH201 goes first, a corresponding performance corresponding to the post-introduction performance may be executed in the performance mode of the first corresponding performance.

When the first character display performance included in the first performance, such as production execution example 002AK302, is executed and the first character introduction performance included in the first corresponding production is executed, the recognition performance is higher than that of the first corresponding production. It may be possible to perform the second corresponding performance in a performance mode that is difficult to perform. When the second character display effect included in the second effect is executed, such as the effect execution example 002AK304, and the second character introduction effect included in the second corresponding effect is executed, the recognition performance is higher than the second corresponding effect. It may be possible to perform the first corresponding performance in a performance mode that is difficult to perform. The first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect can be created by varying the size of the effect image, transmittance, sharpness, color tone, volume of audio output, amount of light emitted from the light emitting member, emitted light color, and other arbitrary effect modes. It is sufficient if it can be executed in a manner that is difficult to recognize.

It is not limited to reach effects that become super reach, but if it is possible to execute a second effect that can be switched after the first effect is executed, the It may also be possible to start execution of the 2-compatible performance. When a specific effect including a character movement effect, etc. is executed, after starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, when switching to the first pattern and executing the specific effect, it is executed in the second pattern. It may be possible to execute a second corresponding performance corresponding to the specific performance and a first corresponding performance corresponding to the specific performance executed in the first pattern. In this case, after starting the execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, before switching to the first pattern and executing the specific effect, the execution of the first corresponding effect may be started while the specific effect is being executed in the second pattern. It may be possible to start. All or part of the first effect, the first corresponding effect, the second effect, and the second corresponding effect include the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, and the use of the game effect lamp 9 and decoration. Any performance device may be used as long as it can be performed, such as lighting of a light emitting member such as an LED, operation of a movable member including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

FIG. 10-41 shows an example of performance execution in the case where the performance symbols are displayed transparently in accordance with the post-reach performance. The post-reach performance becomes executable when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach state based on the determination result in step AKS106 of the performance symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27. However, if only the reach performance that becomes normal reach is performed and the reach performance that becomes super reach is not performed, the post-reach performance does not need to be performed. Alternatively, if only the reach effect resulting in a normal reach is executed and the reach effect resulting in a super reach is not executed, it is possible to execute the post-reach effect at a lower rate than when the reach effect resulting in a super reach is executed. Good too.

10-41 (A1) to FIG. 10-41 (C1) show an example of performance execution when a background display performance is executed as a post-reach performance. In the effect execution example 002AK401 shown in FIG. 10-41 (A1), the effect image is displayed transparently along with the background display effect using the display image AKF1. In the effect execution example 002AK402 shown in FIG. 10-41 (B1), the effect image is displayed transparently along with the background display effect using the display image AKF2. In the effect execution example 002AK403 shown in FIG. 10-41 (C1), the effect image is displayed transparently along with the background display effect using the display image AKF3. In these cases, the performance design can be displayed transparently at a constant transmittance that is the first transmittance during a specific period from the start to the end of the background display performance that is the post-reach performance.

FIG. 10-41 (A2) to FIG. 10-41 (D2) show an example of performance execution when a step-up performance is executed as a post-reach performance. In the effect execution example 002AK411 shown in FIG. 10-41 (A2), a display image AKG1 is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "1" in the first stage in the step-up effect. In the effect execution example 002AK412 shown in FIG. 10-41 (B2), a display image AKG2 is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "2" in the second stage in the step-up effect. In the effect execution example 002AK413 shown in FIG. 10-41 (C2), a display image AKG3 is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "3" in the third stage in the step-up effect. In the effect execution example 002AK414 shown in FIG. 10-41 (D2), a display image AKG4 is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "4" in the fourth stage in the step-up effect. In these cases, the performance design is displayed at a second transmittance that is lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the start of the specific period during a specific period from the start to the end of the step-up performance that is the post-reach performance. It can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period.

FIG. 10-42 shows an example of execution control of a production in which production symbols are displayed transparently in accordance with the post-reach production. In step AKS107 of the performance symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27, a performance control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the post-reach performance is determined. Using the performance control pattern determined in step AKS107, step AKS133 of the process during performance pattern variation shown in FIG. 10-31 enables performance control for transparently displaying the performance symbols together with the post-reach performance. Become. FIG. 10-42(A) shows a performance execution period during which the post-reach performance can be executed. In this case, the variable display in which the super reach effect is executed starts changing at timing T11. After that, when the variable display becomes a ready-to-win state at timing T12, the execution of the after-reach performance is started in response to the establishment of the ready-to-reach state, and the after-reach performance can be executed during a specific period up to timing T13. When the post-reach performance ends at timing T13, the development performance is executed, and the reach performance that becomes super reach can be executed during the period up to timing T14.

During the period from timing T12 to timing T13 when a post-reach performance can be executed, performance symbols are made transparent and displayable according to a transition pattern. When the after-reach performance is determined in step AKS106 of the performance symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27, the determination result of the after-reach performance is determined as shown in decision example 002AKD62 shown in FIG. 10-29(B). It is possible to determine the symbol transparency pattern corresponding to the . Corresponding to the symbol transparency pattern determined in step AKS106, it is sufficient if it is possible to execute symbol transparency control to make the performance symbols transparent in step AKS133 of the performance symbol variation process shown in FIG. 10-31.

FIG. 10-42(B) shows an example of setting the symbol transmittance corresponding to the symbol transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in determination example 002AKD62 shown in FIG. 10-29(B). When the after-reach effect is a background display effect, a symbol transparent pattern TSP1 is determined. The symbol transparency pattern TSP1 allows the performance symbols to be displayed transparently at a constant transmittance, which is the first transmittance, from timing T12, which is the start timing of the after-reach performance, to timing T13, which is the end timing of the after-reach performance. do. In this way, when any of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 corresponding to the background display effect is displayed in the after-reach effect, a certain transmittance that becomes the first transmittance is set during a specific period from timing T12 to timing T13. It is possible to display the performance symbols transparently in the symbol transparent pattern TSP1, which is a transition pattern in which is maintained.

When the after-reach performance is a step-up performance, a symbol transparent pattern TSP2 is determined. The symbol transparency pattern TSP2 is capable of displaying the performance symbols transparently at a second transmittance that is lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance at timing T12, which is the start timing of the post-reach performance. be. Thereafter, the symbol transmission pattern TSP2 changes so that the transparency of the performance symbol increases stepwise. For example, if the transmittance of the effect pattern changes to become higher in stages at each timing when the display of display images AKG1 to AKG4 changes corresponding to the number of steps from "1" to "4" in the step-up effect. good. Then, at timing T13, which is the end timing of the post-reach performance, the symbol transparency pattern TSP2 transmits and displays the performance symbols at a third transmittance that is higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance. It is possible. In this way, when the display of display images AKG1 to AKG4 corresponding to the step-up effect can be changed in the post-reach effect, the effect symbols are changed in a specific period from timing T12 to timing T13 in response to the start of the specific period. can be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, and a transition pattern can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period. It is possible to display the performance symbols transparently using the symbol transparent pattern TSP2.

When the after-reach performance is a story performance, a symbol transparency pattern TSP3 is determined. The symbol transparency pattern TSP3 is capable of displaying the performance symbols transparently at a second transmittance that is lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance at timing T12, which is the start timing of the post-reach performance. be. Thereafter, the symbol transmission pattern TSP3 changes so that the transmittance of the performance symbol increases in a curved manner. For example, in a story production, as a series of stories progresses from displaying display image AKH11 to displaying any of display images AKH41 to AKH44, the transmittance of the production pattern changes to increase in a curved manner. do it. Then, at timing T13, which is the end timing of the post-reach performance, the symbol transparency pattern TSP3 transmits and displays the performance symbols at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance. It is possible. In this way, when it is possible to change from the display of the display image AKH11 corresponding to the story effect to the display of any of the display images AKH41 to AKH44 in the after-reach effect, during the specific period from timing T12 to timing T13, In response to the start of the specific period, the performance design can be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, and in response to the end of the specific period, the performance design can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance. It is possible to transparently display the performance symbols using the symbol transparent pattern TSP3, which is a transition pattern that can be displayed at a rate. In addition, the second transmittance corresponding to the case of story production may be a different transmittance from the second transmittance corresponding to the case of step-up production, or may be a common transmittance. In the setting example shown in FIG. 10-42(B), both second transmittances are 0% at timing T12. The third transmittance corresponding to the story effect may be different from the third transmittance corresponding to the step-up effect, or may be a common transmittance. In the setting example shown in Figure 10-42(B), the third transmittance corresponding to the step-up effect is 80% at timing T13, and the third transmittance corresponding to the story effect is 80% at timing T13. The transmittance is 100%, so the transmittance is different.

The after-reach performance is determined at different decision rates depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot", as in the decision example 002AKD61 shown in Figure 10-29(A). Ru. When a story effect is executed as a post-reach effect, there is a higher expectation that the player will be controlled into a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state, than when a background display effect or a step-up effect is executed. In addition, when a step-up performance is executed as a post-reach performance, the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when a background display performance is executed. . Therefore, when the after-reach effect is a background display effect, the effect pattern can be displayed transparently according to the pattern transparency pattern TSP1, and by displaying any of the display images AKF1 to AKF3, a jackpot game state is achieved. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation controlled by When the after-reach performance is a step-up performance, the performance symbols can be displayed transparently according to the symbol transparency pattern TSP2, and the display images AKG1 to AKG4 are displayed changeably, thereby controlling the jackpot game state. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation. When the after-reach performance is a story performance, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently according to the pattern transparency pattern TSP3, and any of the display images AKH11 to AKH41 to AKH44 can be displayed changeably. Accordingly, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, when the symbol transparent pattern serving as a transition pattern is the symbol transparent pattern TSP1 as the first transition pattern, and when it is either the symbol transparent pattern TSP2 or TSP3 as the second transition pattern, the display The types of display images that serve as special images differ. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately execute the after-reach performance included in the ready-to-reach performance, which is a special performance, so that the degree of attention to the display of the performance symbol as the transmitted identification information is increased, and to improve the game interest.

In addition, the symbol transparency pattern TSP2 corresponding to the case where the after-reach effect is a step-up effect is more effective than the case where the effect pattern is transparently displayed according to the pattern transparent pattern TSP1 corresponding to the case where the after-reach effect is a background display effect. The jackpot game state is controlled better when the performance symbols are displayed transparently according to the pattern, or when the performance symbols are transparently displayed according to the symbol transparency pattern TSP3 corresponding to the case where the after-reach performance is a story performance. Expectations are higher. The symbol transparency pattern TSP1 allows the performance symbols to be displayed at the first transparency from the start to the end of the specific period as a first special performance corresponding to the background display performance. The symbol transparency pattern TSP2 can display the performance symbol at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of a specific period, as a second special performance corresponding to the step-up performance, and the end of the specific period. In response to this, the effect pattern can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance. The pattern transparency pattern TSP3 is a second special effect corresponding to the story effect, and can display the effect pattern at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of a specific period, and at the end of the specific period. Correspondingly, the effect pattern can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance. As a result, it is possible to appropriately execute the first special performance and the second special performance with different transmittance settings, thereby improving the game's interest.

The symbol transparency pattern that allows the performance symbols to be displayed transparently may be determined at different rates, for example, corresponding to the performance mode of the preview performance performed before the after-reach performance. For example, when the after-reach performance is a background display performance, any of the symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio, and the preview performance executed before the after-reach performance is a performance with low jackpot expectations. In this case, the determination rate of the symbol transparent pattern TSP1 may be set to be higher than the determination rate of the symbol transparent patterns TSP2 and TSP3. On the other hand, when the preview performance executed before the post-reach performance is a performance mode with high expectation of jackpot, the determination rate of symbol transparent pattern TSP3 is higher than the determination rate of symbol transparent patterns TSP1 and TSP2. It may be set so that In this way, the transition pattern when displaying the performance symbol that is identification information transparently corresponds to the performance mode of the preview performance that was executed before the post-reach performance that is included in the reach performance that is the special performance. The ratio of the first transition pattern to the second transition pattern may be different.

When the after-reach effect is a background display effect, when the effect pattern is displayed transparently with the pattern transparency pattern TSP1, a special image is displayed while the effect pattern is transparent and displayed with this pattern transparency pattern TSP1. By doing so, the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state may be higher than when the performance symbols are displayed transparently according to either of the symbol transparency patterns TSP2 and TSP3. For example, it may be determined that the jackpot game state is controlled by executing a chance-up performance using a winning confirmation image while the performance symbols are displayed transparently in the symbol transparent pattern TSP1. In addition, by executing a transparency change effect using a change notification image while the effect pattern is being displayed transparently in the pattern transparent pattern TSP1, the effect image is transparent in either the pattern transparent pattern TSP2 or TSP3. It may also be possible to change the effect to one that can be displayed.

If the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped during execution of a post-reach performance included in a special performance, such as a reach-to-reach performance, and then the power supply is restarted, any of the symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 Even if the effect pattern is displayed transparently, a common recovery effect may be executed using, for example, a recovery display image.

When the effect design is transparently displayed using any of the pattern transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3, the type, size, shape, pattern, color, and any other display mode of the effect pattern can be changed. It should be controlled by. The performance mode of the performance pattern may be set as long as it can be set by the control data included in the performance control pattern.

When the time-saving condition based on the number of executions of the variable display is satisfied, the gaming state can be controlled to the time-saving state, and the information becomes identification information whether the game is controlled to save time or not. The determination rates of the symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3, which are transition patterns that can be displayed through the performance symbols, may be set to be different. For example, when the after-reach effect is a background display effect, it is possible to determine any of the symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 at a predetermined ratio, and when the relief time is controlled to be short, the relief time is not controlled to be short. Also, it may be possible to display the performance symbols transparently using the symbol transparent pattern TSP3 at a high rate.

When a time-saving condition based on the number of execution times of the variable display is satisfied, the gaming state can be controlled to a time-saving state, and corresponding to the variable display for which the time-saving condition is satisfied, any of the symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 that becomes a transition pattern A restriction may be provided so that the symbol transparency control for displaying the performance symbols transparently is not executed. In this way, in the range where the variable display in which the time-saving conditions for controlling to shorten the rescue time are executed, the symbol transparency that displays the production symbol transparently using any of the symbol transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3, which are transition patterns, is executed. A restriction may be provided as a limit to which no control is performed.

FIGS. 10-43 to 10-45 show examples of effect execution when a timer standby effect and a timer effect are executed. Of these, FIG. 10-43 shows an example of performance execution when the performance pattern TPA1 is determined to be a timer performance pattern and the performance pattern TPB0 is determined to be a standby performance pattern based on the occurrence of a starting prize. . The timer standby effect becomes executable when a starting prize occurs based on the determination result at step AKS032 of the timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21. When it is determined in step AKS032 of the timer effect determination process that the timer effect is to be executed with "timer effect," a performance pattern that becomes a pattern for timer effect is determined in step AKS034, and an effect that becomes a pattern for standby effect in step AKS035. A pattern is determined. Subsequently, execution of the timer standby effect is started by the timer standby effect start setting in step AKS036.

Figure 10-43 (A) shows that when a starting winning occurs during execution of the variable display of performance symbols and the number of pending memories becomes "3", the timer performance determination process changes the performance pattern TPA1 for the timer performance. The effect execution example 002AK601 is shown when the effect pattern TPB0 is determined as the standby effect pattern. At this time, the display image AKJ1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting prize winning, thereby suggesting that execution of the timer effect is on standby. In this way, before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, the timer standby effect is executed using the effect pattern TPB0 determined as the pattern for standby effect.

FIG. 10-43(B) shows effect execution example 002AK602 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK601. FIG. 10-43(C) shows effect execution example 002AK603 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK602. These variable displays are executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to these variable displays, the timer standby effect in the continuous effect mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB0. In this case, the timer standby performance is executed in a performance mode in which the specific display does not change.

FIG. 10-43(D) shows effect execution example 002AK604 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK603. When this variable display is started, a timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA1 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ21 to notify a message of "5 seconds left."

In FIG. 10-44, based on the occurrence of a starting prize, either production pattern TPA1 or TPA3 is determined to be a pattern for timer production, and production pattern TPB1-1 or TPB1-2 is determined to be a pattern for standby production. This shows an example of the execution of the effect when FIG. 10-44(A) shows a production execution example 002AK611 in which a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning is started, which is common to production patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2. Regardless of which of the production patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2 is determined as the standby production pattern, display image AKJ0 can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when starting execution of the timer standby production. , indicates that execution of the timer effect is on standby. Thereafter, a timer standby effect is executed in a changing effect mode in which a specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes in accordance with the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2.

FIG. 10-44 (B1) and FIG. 10-44 (C1) show examples of effect execution when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1. Of these, FIG. 10-44 (B1) shows effect execution example 002AK612 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK611. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the first variation mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1. In this case, the specific display using display image AKJ0 changes to the specific display using display image AKJ1. FIG. 10-44 (C1) shows effect execution example 002AK613 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK612. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the first variation mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1. Here, similar to the previous variable display, specific display using display image AKJ1 is performed.

FIG. 10-44 (D1) shows effect execution example 002AK614 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK613. When this variable display is started, a timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA1 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ21 to notify a message of "5 seconds left."

FIG. 10-44 (B2) and FIG. 10-44 (C2) show an example of performance execution when the timer standby performance is executed in the performance pattern TPB1-2. Of these, FIG. 10-44 (B2) shows effect execution example 002AK615 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK611. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the second variation mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2. In this case, the specific display using display image AKJ0 changes to the specific display using display image AKJ2. FIG. 10-44 (C2) shows effect execution example 002AK616 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK615. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the second variation mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2. Here, similar to the previous variable display, specific display using display image AKJ2 is performed.

FIG. 10-44 (D2) shows effect execution example 002AK617 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK616. When this variable display is started, a timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA3 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ23 to notify a message of "15 seconds left."

In FIG. 10-45, based on the occurrence of a starting prize, either production pattern TPA2 or TPA4 is determined to be a timer production pattern, and production pattern TPB2-1 or TPB2-2 is determined to be a standby production pattern. This shows an example of the execution of the effect when FIG. 10-45(A) shows performance execution example 002AK621 in which a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning is started, which is common to the performance patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2. Regardless of which of the production patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 is determined as the pattern for standby production, displaying the display image AKJ0 on the screen of the image display device 5 when starting the execution of the timer standby production , indicates that execution of the timer effect is on standby. After that, corresponding to the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, a timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display using display image AKJ0 does not change, and is different from the specific effect using display image AKJ0. The pre-stage performance is executed. FIG. 10-45(B) shows effect execution example 002AK622 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK621. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to this variable display, a timer standby effect with a continuous change mode is performed in either of the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2. executed. In this case, the timer standby performance is executed in a performance mode in which the specific display does not change.

FIG. 10-45 (C1) shows effect execution example 002AK623 after a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK622. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby effect in the continuous effect mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-1. Here, similar to the previous variable display, specific display using display image AKJ0 is performed. In this case, a timer standby effect using the specific display using the display image AKJ0 and a pre-stage effect using the display image AKJ11 are executed. The pre-stage effect using the display image AKJ11 only needs to be executable before the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK623, and can be executed at any one of the start of the variable display, the execution of the variable display, and the end of the variable display. It is sufficient if it is compatible and executable. FIG. 10-45 (D1) shows effect execution example 002AK624 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK623. When this variable display is started, a timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA2 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA2, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ22 to notify a message of "10 seconds left."

FIG. 10-45 (C2) shows effect execution example 002AK625 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK622. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby effect in the continuous effect mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2. Here, similar to the previous variable display, specific display using display image AKJ0 is performed. In this case, a timer standby effect using the specific display using the display image AKJ0 and a pre-stage effect using the display image AKJ12 are executed. The pre-stage performance using the display image AKJ12 only needs to be executed before the end of the variable display in the performance execution example 002AK623, and can be performed at multiple timings such as the start of the variable display, the execution of the variable display, and the end of the variable display. It is sufficient if it can be executed in accordance with any one of these timings. FIG. 10-45 (D2) shows effect execution example 002AK626 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in effect execution example 002AK625. When this variable display is started, a timer effect is executed using the effect pattern TPA4 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ24 to notify a message of "20 seconds left."

FIG. 10-46 shows an example of execution control of the timer standby effect and the timer effect. In this execution control example, execution of the timer standby performance is started based on the occurrence of a starting prize. After that, after the start of the variable display corresponding to the two shift timings, the timer standby performance is controlled so that it can be executed in the continuous performance mode or the change production mode until the variable display that becomes the target change starts. do. In response to the start of the variable display resulting in the target change, execution of the timer effect is started. The timer effects have different executable periods corresponding to the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4 that can be determined as timer effect patterns. For example, when a timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ21 to notify a message of "5 seconds remaining", and the timer effect can be executed within the executable period of 5 seconds. That's fine. In addition, when a timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA2, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ22 to notify a message of "10 seconds left", and the timer effect can be executed within the executable period of 10 seconds. That's fine. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ23 to notify the message "15 seconds left", and if the timer effect can be executed within the executable period of 15 seconds. Bye. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ24 to notify the message "20 seconds left", and if the timer effect can be executed within the executable period of 20 seconds. Bye. In this way, in the timer effect, depending on the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4, the period of a specific display for notifying a message using any of the display images AKJ21 to AKJ24 may be a short period or may be a long period. It would be good if there was a case. Note that the specific display is not limited to notifying a message using a display image, but may be one that can display any effect image.

In example 002AKD22 of determining the performance pattern that becomes the timer performance pattern shown in FIG. 10-23(A), when the winning determination result is "jackpot", the case where the winning determination result is not "jackpot" Also, there is a high probability that a performance pattern, such as either of performance patterns TPA3 or TPA4, in which the executable period of timer performance is long will be determined. Thereby, the degree of expectation that the timer effect will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period than when the specific display is displayed for a short period. In addition, in the determination example 002AKD21 regarding the presence or absence of the timer effect shown in FIG. When the number is large, the decision rate of ``with timer effect'', which executes the timer effect, increases. Thereby, in the timer standby performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period than when the specific display is displayed for a short period.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the performance pattern that becomes the standby performance pattern shown in FIG. 10-23(B), the performance pattern TPB0 becomes the standby performance pattern at a high rate when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA1. When the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA2, it is determined as the standby effect pattern at a low rate. On the other hand, the performance pattern TPB1-1 is determined as the standby performance pattern at a higher rate when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA2 than when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA1. Ru. In addition, the performance pattern TPB1-2 is determined as the standby performance pattern at a high rate when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA3, and is determined as the standby performance pattern when the timer performance pattern is other than the performance pattern TPA3. Not determined. As a result, when the timer standby effect is executed using the effect pattern TPB1-1, the proportion of timer effects executed using the effect pattern TPA2 is higher than when the timer standby effect is executed using the effect pattern TPB0. As a result, the rate at which the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1 becomes lower. When the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2, the executable time is longer than when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0. become executable. The performance pattern TPB0 is a performance pattern that allows a timer standby performance to be executed in a continuous performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change. The performance pattern TPB1-1 is a performance pattern that allows execution of a timer standby performance in a changing display mode in which a specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to a first changing display using the display image AKJ1. The performance pattern TPB1-2 is a performance pattern that allows execution of a timer standby performance in a changing display mode in which a specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to a second changing display using the display image AKJ2. Based on such settings, when the timer standby effect is executed as a change effect in the change effect mode in which the specific display changes than when the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, the executable period of the timer effect is longer, and the specific display can be displayed for a longer period in the timer effect.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the performance pattern that becomes the standby performance pattern shown in FIG. 10-23(B), the performance pattern TPB2-1 is the performance pattern TPB1-1 when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA2. When the timer effect pattern is TPA1, it is determined as the standby effect pattern at a lower rate than the effect pattern TPB1-1. Further, the performance pattern TPB2-1 can be determined as a standby performance pattern at a predetermined rate even when the timer performance pattern is either performance pattern TPA3 or TPA4. Performance pattern TPB2-2 is determined as a standby performance pattern at a higher rate than other performance patterns when the timer performance pattern is performance pattern TPA4, and when the timer performance pattern is other than performance pattern TPA4. is not determined as a pattern for standby performance. As a result, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-1, it is better to perform the timer standby effect in any of the effect patterns TPA2 to TPA4 than when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1. The proportion of execution of timer effects becomes high, and the proportion of execution of timer effects in production pattern TPA1 becomes low. The executable time is longer when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2 than when the timer standby effect is executed in either effect pattern TPB1-1 or TPB1-2. The timer effect can be executed with patterns TPB1-4. The performance pattern TPB2-1 executes a timer standby performance in a continuous performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and can also execute a preliminary stage performance by displaying the display image AKJ11 separately from the specific display. This is a performance pattern. The production pattern TPB2-2 executes a timer standby production in a continuous production mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and can also execute a pre-stage production by displaying the display image AKJ12 separately from the specific display. This is a performance pattern. Note that the pre-stage effect is not limited to displaying either of the display images AKJ11 or AKJ12, but may include displaying any effect image on the image display device 5, outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. Any performance device may be used as long as it can be performed, such as lighting of a light emitting member such as a decorative LED, operation of a movable member including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

Based on these settings, even if the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change and the change effect is not executed, the specific display changes when the previous stage effect is executed. The executable period of the timer effect becomes longer than when the timer standby effect is executed as a change effect in the effect mode, and the specific display can be displayed for a longer period in the timer effect. Therefore, the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is executed in the change effect mode in which the specific display changes, rather than the case where the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is not executed in the continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, the executable time of the timer effect becomes longer in the variable display that causes the target variation, so that the specific display can be displayed for a longer period after the variable display that causes the target variation. On the other hand, even if the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change and the change effect is not executed, in the change effect mode in which the specific display changes when the previous stage effect is executed. Since the executable time of the timer effect is longer in the variable display that is the target change than when the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is executed, the specific display can be displayed for a long period of time after the variable display that is the target change. Can be displayed. In this way, even if the specific display does not change before the variable display that is the target change, the specific display may be changed before the variable display that is the target change, depending on whether or not the previous stage effect is executed. Compared to the case where the change occurs, a different setting is whether or not the specific display can be displayed for a long period of time after the variable display that is the target change. When the specific display is displayed for a long period of time than when it is displayed for a short period of time, the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher. As a result, even if the specific display does not change before the variable display that becomes the target change, if the previous stage effect is executed, the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the variable display that becomes the target change. The interest in the game can be improved by appropriately executing the changing performance and the preliminary stage performance so that the degree of attention to the display is increased.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the performance pattern that becomes the standby performance pattern shown in FIG. When the timer standby performance is executed, the ratio of executing the timer performance in any of the performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4 becomes higher, and the ratio of executing the timer performance in the performance pattern TPA1 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the timer standby effect is executed with the effect pattern TPB1-2, the timer effect is executed with the effect pattern TPA3 than when the timer standby effect is executed with the effect pattern TPB2-1. The percentage of people who do so increases. On the other hand, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2, it is possible to execute the timer effect in the effect pattern TPA4, which is not possible when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2. become. Performance patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 enable the pre-stage performance to be performed in different performance modes. Therefore, when the pre-stage performance can be performed in one of multiple types of performance modes, the timer standby performance will take longer than when the timer standby performance is executed in the changing performance mode, corresponding to the production mode of the pre-stage production. The rate at which timer effects are executed during the executable period can be made different. Not limited to production patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, if any pre-stage production can be executed in any of multiple production modes, a specific display may be made in accordance with the production mode of the pre-stage production. It is sufficient that the ratio at which the specific display is displayed for a longer period after the variable display that is the target change is different than when the changing effect is executed.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the performance pattern that becomes the standby performance pattern shown in FIG. When the timer standby performance is executed, the ratio of execution of the timer performance in the performance pattern TPA4 becomes higher. Further, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-1, the timer effect can be executed in any of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. On the other hand, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2, the timer effect is not executed in any of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. Therefore, when the pre-stage performance can be executed in one of multiple types of performance modes, it is possible to display a specific display in the timer performance after the variable display that is subject to change, corresponding to the performance mode of the pre-stage performance. The average time length of the periods can be different. Not limited to production patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, if any pre-stage production can be performed in any of multiple production modes, target variation and It is sufficient that the expected value of the period in which the specific display can be displayed after the variable display is different.

For example, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0, the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, it may be possible to perform a change display in which the specific display changes in the timer effect. In this way, when the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change and the change effect is not executed, the effect mode of the timer effect changes in the variable display where the target change occurs, so that the target change does not occur. It may be possible to perform a change effect in which the specific display changes after the variable display.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the performance pattern that becomes the standby performance pattern shown in FIG. 10-23(B), the timer standby performance is not executed in the performance pattern TPB1-1, but in the performance pattern TPB1-2. When the timer standby performance is executed, the timer performance becomes executable in the performance pattern TPA3. When the timer standby performance is executed in the performance pattern TPB1-1, the timer performance can be executed in either of the performance patterns TPA1 or TPA2, but the timer performance cannot be executed in the performance pattern TPA3. When the timer standby performance is executed in the performance pattern TPB1-2, the timer performance is not executed in either of the performance patterns TPA1 and TPA2. Therefore, when a timer standby effect is executed and a change effect is executed in a change effect mode in which a specific display changes, the timer effect after the variable display that becomes the target change corresponds to the change effect mode of the timer standby effect. The average length of time during which a specific display can be displayed can be made different. Not limited to production patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2, if any change performance can be executed in any of multiple types of performance modes, a variable that becomes the target variation according to the performance mode of the change performance. It is sufficient that the expected value of the period during which the specific display can be displayed after the display is different.

For example, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0, the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, the pre-stage effect may be made executable in a timer effect or a variable display that changes the target. In response to the execution of such a pre-stage effect, the specific display in the timer effect may be erased. For example, in the final stage of a reach performance that becomes a super reach, when a final notification performance is executed to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, control may be performed to erase the specific display.

A specific timing that is set to correspond to the progress of any performance before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment and after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, without being limited to those that can execute specific effects, etc. It may also be possible to perform a specific performance before or after a specific timing. For example, if it is possible to perform a variable display effect that results in a pseudo continuous variation multiple times while executing a single variable display, the timing at which the pseudo continuous variation starts for a specific time is set as a specific timing, and the specific timing It may be possible to perform a specific effect before and after a specific timing. In such a case, the execution pattern of the specific performance includes a first pattern that inherits the performance mode of the specific performance after a specific timing, and a second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the specific timing. If a predetermined performance such as a switching suggestion performance is executed after starting execution of a specific performance in the second pattern, it is only necessary that the specific performance can be switched to the first pattern and executed. In addition, when there is a first pattern that inherits the production mode of a specific production after a specific timing, and a second pattern that does not inherit the production mode of the specific production after the specific timing, various productions described in the above embodiments are provided. It is good if it is possible to execute.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 002AK)
(1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means capable of starting execution of a specific performance before the variable display that is the subject of the determination based on the determination by the determination means,
The performance execution means are
As the execution pattern of the specific performance, there is a first pattern in which the performance mode of the specific performance is inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and a second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the target of the determination. has a pattern;
When a predetermined performance is executed after starting execution of the specific performance in the second pattern, the specific performance can be switched to the first pattern and executed.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSA. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a switching suggestion performance. The fact that the specific performance can be executed by switching to the first pattern may be the case, for example, when a character movement performance is executed using a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD.
According to such a configuration, when the predetermined effect is executed after starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect, thereby increasing the attention level to the effect. It is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined performance and the specific performance so as to increase the player's interest in the game.

(2) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
A specific effect execution means capable of starting execution of the specific effect before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means,
The specific performance execution means includes a first pattern that inherits the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and a performance of the specific performance after the variable display that is the target of the determination, as an execution pattern of the specific performance. a second pattern that does not inherit the aspect;
Further comprising a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests switching to the first pattern when the specific effect is being executed in the second pattern,
The specific effect execution means is capable of continuously executing the specific effect in the second pattern when the suggestive effect is executed after starting the execution of the specific effect in the second pattern and it is not possible to switch to the first pattern. You can.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes step AKS123. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSA. The suggestion effect may be, for example, a switching suggestion effect. The suggested effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS043. It is only necessary that the specific effect can be executed continuously in the second pattern, for example, in the case of effect execution example 002AK115.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is executed after starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern and it is not possible to switch to the first pattern, it is possible to continue executing the specific effect in the second pattern. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately execute the suggestion performance and the specific performance so as to increase the degree of attention to the performance, thereby improving the game's interest.

(3) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
A specific effect execution means capable of starting execution of the specific effect before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means,
The specific performance execution means includes, as execution patterns of the specific performance, a plurality of first patterns that inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and a plurality of first patterns that inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and a plurality of first patterns that inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the target of the determination. A second pattern that does not inherit the production mode of
Further comprising a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance that makes the specific performance invisible,
The specific performance execution means is
If the special performance is executed and becomes invisible after starting the execution of the specific performance in the second pattern, it is possible to end the specific performance without restarting it,
If the special performance is executed and becomes invisible after starting execution of the specific performance in the first pattern, it may be possible to restart the specific performance in the first pattern with a different performance mode.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes step AKS123. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSA. The special effect may be, for example, a character hiding effect. The special performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes step AKS035. The fact that it is possible to end the specific performance without restarting it may be the case, for example, if it is determined to "end the display" in step AKS036. It is possible to restart the specific performance using the first pattern with a different performance mode, for example, when the display target of characters CH11 to CH14 changes when "display restart" is determined in step AKS036. good.
According to such a configuration, when the special performance is executed and becomes invisible after the execution of the specific performance has started, the first pattern has a different performance mode from the case where the specific performance can be ended without restarting. Since there are times when it is possible to restart the specific performance, it is possible to appropriately execute the special performance and the specific performance so that the degree of attention to the performance is increased, and to improve the game's interest.

(4) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means capable of starting execution of a specific performance before the variable display that is the subject of the determination based on the determination by the determination means,
The performance execution means are
As the execution pattern of the specific performance, there is a first pattern in which the production mode of the specific production is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, and a plurality of patterns that do not inherit the production mode of the specific production after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. a second pattern;
After starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed,
The rate at which the specific effect is switched to the first pattern and executed may vary depending on the plurality of second patterns.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSA. The fact that the specific performance can be executed by switching to the first pattern may be the case, for example, when a character movement performance is executed using a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD. The rate at which the specific effect is executed by switching to the first pattern may be different as long as it is the case, for example, in the display rate setting example 002AKE01.
According to such a configuration, by varying the ratio of switching to the first pattern and executing the specific effect in response to the plurality of second patterns, the specific effect is appropriately executed so as to increase the degree of attention to the effect. Thus, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

(5) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means capable of starting execution of a specific performance before the variable display that is the subject of the determination based on the determination by the determination means,
The performance execution means are
As the execution pattern of the specific performance, there are a plurality of first patterns in which the performance mode of the specific performance is inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and a plurality of first patterns that do not inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the target of the determination. a second pattern;
After starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed,
Depending on whether the execution of the specific effect is started in the first pattern or the case where the execution of the specific effect is started in the second pattern and then switched to the first pattern, the specific effect is executed in which of the plurality of first patterns. The rate of execution may be different.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the moving performance type RSA. The fact that the specific performance can be executed by switching to the first pattern may be the case, for example, when a character movement performance is executed using a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD. The ratio of the specific performance to be performed in which of the plurality of first patterns may be different as long as it is the display rate setting example 002AKE02, for example.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of first By varying the proportion of the patterns in which the specific performance is executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the specific performance so as to increase the degree of attention to the performance, thereby improving the game's interest.

(6) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display from a first mode to a second mode that is expected to be controlled to be more advantageous than the first mode;
The information processing apparatus may further include a history suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode after the execution of the change effect is started.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The corresponding display may be, for example, a pending display or an active display. The change effect may be, for example, an active display change effect. The change performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that controls the active display change performance by step AKS131. The history suggestion performance may be, for example, a performance based on the active display of the performance execution example 002AK204. The history suggestion performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that controls the display state of the active display by step AKS131.
According to such a configuration, since the history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode can be executed after the execution of the change effect is started, it becomes possible to recognize the previous display mode for the corresponding display, which increases the interest in the game. can be improved.

(7) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion performance that can execute a first performance and a second performance that is switched after execution of the first performance as a suggestion performance that suggests that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state when the variable display is in a ready-to-reach state. execution means and
A corresponding performance execution means capable of executing a first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance and a second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance,
The corresponding performance execution means may be capable of starting execution of the second corresponding performance during execution of the first performance before switching from the first performance to the second performance.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The suggestive effect may be, for example, a reach effect that is a super reach. The first effect may be, for example, an effect by displaying the character CH201 in the effect execution examples 002AK302 and 002AK303. The second effect may be, for example, an effect by displaying the character CH202 in the effect execution example 002AK304. The suggested effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 that controls execution of the ready-to-reach effect by step AKS133, for example. The first corresponding effect may be, for example, an effect by displaying a message in the effect execution example 002AK302. The second corresponding effect may be, for example, an effect by displaying a message in the effect execution example 002AK304. The corresponding effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that controls message display in step AKS133. The fact that execution of the second corresponding effect can be started during execution of the first effect may be, for example, an effect by displaying a message in effect execution example 002AK303.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to start executing the second corresponding effect while the first effect is being executed before switching from the first effect to the second effect, so that it is possible to easily recognize the change in effect and the relationship between the effects. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(8) A gaming machine that executes variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect indicating that the control is in an advantageous state;
In the special performance, a transparent display means capable of transparently displaying identification information according to a transition pattern;
A special image display means capable of indicating the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state by displaying a special image when the identification information is transmitted;
The type of special image displayed may be different depending on whether the transition pattern is the first transition pattern or the second transition pattern.
Here, the identification information may be, for example, a production pattern. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The special performance may be, for example, a post-reach performance. The special performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the post-reach performance by step AKS133. The transparent display means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that controls the transparent display of the performance symbols in any of the symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in step AKS133. The special image may be any effect image that can be displayed, for example, in a background display effect, step-up effect, or story effect. The special image display means may be, for example, the image display device 5 when the after-reach effect is executed in step AKS133. The different types of special images to be displayed may be determined by, for example, determining the transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in determination example 002AKD62.
According to such a configuration, the types of special images displayed are different depending on whether the transition pattern is the first transition pattern or the second transition pattern, thereby drawing attention to the display of the transparent identification information. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by appropriately executing special performances so as to increase the game play.

(9) A gaming machine that executes variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect indicating that the control is in an advantageous state;
In the special performance, a transparent display means capable of transmitting and displaying identification information according to a transition pattern,
The special performance is
including a specific period,
a first special performance that can display identification information at a first transmittance from the start to the end of a specific period;
The identification information can be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specific period, and the identification information can be displayed at a lower transmittance than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period. a second special effect that can be displayed with a high third transmittance;
The degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the second special performance is performed than when the first special performance is performed.
Here, the identification information may be, for example, a production pattern. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The special performance may be, for example, a post-reach performance. The special performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the post-reach performance by step AKS133. The transparent display means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that controls the transparent display of the performance symbols in any of the symbol transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in step AKS133. The first special effect may be, for example, a background display effect. The second special performance may be, for example, a step-up performance or a story performance. The high degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, the decision rate in decision example 002AKD61.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the first special performance and the second special performance with different transmittance settings, thereby improving the game's interest.

(10) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
A determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
A change performance execution means capable of executing a change performance that changes the display mode of the specific display before the variable display that is the subject of the determination based on the determination of the determination means,
The specific display means can display the specific display for a longer period in the variable display corresponding to the specific display that is the target of the change effect when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed. and
When a specific display is displayed for a long period of time, the expectation that it will be controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed for a short period of time.
If the change effect is not executed before the variable display that is the target of the judgment and the previous stage effect is executed, the change effect will be higher than if the change effect was executed before the variable display that was the target of the judgment. , the specific display may be able to be displayed for a long period of time after the variable display that is the subject of the determination.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The specific display may be, for example, a timer standby effect or a character display in a timer effect. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The change effect may be, for example, a timer standby effect executed in the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2. The change performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the timer standby performance in the performance patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2 in step AKS127. The fact that a specific display can be displayed for a long period after a specific timing may be, for example, the determination rate of performance patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB1-2 in determination example 002AKD23. The high degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, the determination rate of the timer effect in decision example 002AKD21 or the determination rate of the effect pattern in decision example 002AKD22. The fact that a specific display can be displayed for a long period after a specific timing may be, for example, the determination rate of performance patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 in determination example 002AKD23.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the changing performance and the preliminary stage performance so as to increase the degree of attention to the specific display, thereby improving the game's interest.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 4A... First special symbol display device 4B... Second special symbol display device 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 50... Special variable winning ball device 100... Microcomputer 101 for game control , 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
120... CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
determining means capable of determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is started;
and effect execution means capable of starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display that is the target of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means,
The performance execution means is
As execution patterns of the specific performance, there are a plurality of first patterns that inherit the performance mode after the variable display that was the subject of the determination, and a plurality of first patterns that do not inherit the performance mode after the variable display that was the subject of the determination. It has 2 patterns and
After starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect,
The specific effect starts execution with the first pattern and ends with the first pattern, rather than starting with the second pattern and ending with the second pattern. In this case, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher, and after execution starts with the second pattern than when execution starts with the first pattern and ends with the first pattern. When the first pattern is switched to and executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher,
A plurality of the first patterns may be executed depending on the case where execution of the specific effect is started in the first pattern and the case where the execution of the specific effect is started in the second pattern and then switched to the first pattern. The rate at which the specific performance is executed differs,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images